2019 USER GUIDE
CHRYSLER PACIFICA HYBRID
19RUPHEV-926-AA
SECOND EDITION
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps
to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
www.chrysler.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special oers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on
the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the
instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Chrysler.com (U.S.)
Chrysler.ca (Canada)
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous
and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o
the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
IMPORTANT: Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and
follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-800-247-9753 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL: Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-road highway motor
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steer-
ing wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the features and applica-
tions in this vehicle. Only use the features and ap-
plications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so
may result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or
optional on this vehicle. This guide may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no
longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment de-
scribed in this guide that are not available on this
vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make
changes in design and specifications and/or make
additions to or improvements to its products with-
out imposing any obligation upon itself to install
them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help you
quickly become acquainted with the important fea-
tures of your vehicle. It contains most things you will
need to operate and maintain the vehicle, including
emergency information.
When it comes to service, remember that your au-
thorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR®
parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
HOW TO FIND YOUR
OWNER’S MANUAL
ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a reference
item to help you quickly become acquainted with
the most important features and processes of your
vehicle. It contains most things you will need to
operate and maintain the vehicle, including emer-
gency information and procedures.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedurepossible with your vehicle.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics dis-
cussed in this User Guide, as well as information
covering features and processes not covered in this
User Guide, the full vehicle Owner’s Manual can be
accessed for free online in a printer-friendly PDF
format.
To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appropri-
ate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our envi-
ronment and natural resources. By converting from
paper to electronic delivery for the majority of the
user information for your vehicle, together we
greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products
and lessen the stress on our environment.
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
1
HOW TO USE THIS
MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given,
these must be intended as regarding an occupant in
the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with
this rule will be properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by way
of example only: this might imply that some details
of the image do not correspond to the actual ar-
rangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been conceived
considering vehicles with the steering wheel on the
left side; it is therefore possible that in vehicles with
the steering wheel on the right side, the position or
construction of some controls is not exactly mirror-
like with respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information needed
you can consult the index at the end of this User
Guide.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated
graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few
pages further there is a key for getting to know the
chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs.
There is always a textual indication of the current
chapter at the side of each even page.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be obser ved
when using this component. Refer to “Warning
Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information on the
symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND
CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a series
of WARNINGS to be followed to prevent incorrect
use of components which could cause accidents or
injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed
to prevent against procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
2
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
HOW TO FIND YOUR OWNER’S MANUAL
ONLINE ..........................1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ............2
EssentialInformation ..................2
Symbols .........................2
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL .................7
INTERIOR ........................8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY ..............9
HIGH VOLTAGE CHARGING OPERATION . . . 10
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet ...............10
AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp) .........10
AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp Or 32 Amp) . . 13
Charging Times ....................13
Vehicle Charge Indicators ...............14
Hybrid Electric Pages .................15
KEYS ...........................17
KeyFob ........................17
IGNITIONSWITCH ..................22
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . 24
How To Use Remote Start ..............24
To Enter Remote Start Mode .............25
General Information .................25
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . 25
ToArmTheSystem .................25
ToDisarmTheSystem ................26
DOORS .........................27
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .........27
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped .......30
Hands-Free Sliding Doors — If Equipped .......31
Child Locks ......................32
SEATS ..........................33
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ...........33
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ..........35
Heated Seats .....................37
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ............38
Adjustable Armrest (Front Seats) — If Equipped . . . 38
HEAD RESTRAINTS ..................39
Head Restraints — Front Seats . . ..........39
Head Restraints — Second Row ............40
HeadRestraints—ThirdRow .............41
STEERING WHEEL ..................42
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ..........42
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ........42
MIRRORS ........................43
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped .........43
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ..................44
Multifunction Lever ..................44
HeadlightSwitch ...................44
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .......44
High/Low Beam Switch ................44
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ........45
Flash-To-Pass .....................45
AutomaticHeadlights .................45
Headlights On With Wipers — If Equipped .....46
Headlight Delay — If Equipped ............46
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ............46
Turn Signals ......................46
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS .......47
Front Wiper Operation ................47
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .........48
RearWiperAndWasher ...............49
CLIMATE CONTROLS ................49
AutomaticClimateControls .............49
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ......................53
Operating Tips ....................58
WINDOWS .......................59
Power Windows ....................59
PANORAMIC SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .....61
Opening Sunroof ...................62
Closing Sunroof ....................62
Power Sun Shade — If Equipped ...........62
PinchProtectFeature .................63
Sunroof Maintenance .................63
Ignition Off Operation ................63
HOOD .........................63
Opening ........................63
Closing ........................64
LIFTGATE ........................65
Opening .......................65
Closing ........................65
Power Liftgate — If Equipped .............66
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped . . ........67
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK) ......................68
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....68
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels .........69
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device ..............69
Programming HomeLink To A Garage Door
Opener ........................69
Programming HomeLink To A Miscellaneous
Device .........................70
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button .....71
General Information ..................71
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...............71
Power Outlets .....................71
Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . ....73
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .........74
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls . . 74
OilLifeReset .....................75
KeySense Cluster Messages — If Equipped . . . . . . 75
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ........76
Instrument Cluster Display Programmable Features
ScreenSetup .....................76
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .......77
RedWarningLights ..................77
YellowWarningLights .................81
YellowIndicatorLights ................84
GreenIndicatorLights ................84
WhiteIndicatorLights.................85
BlueIndicatorLights .................85
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . 86
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .....................86
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..................87
Regenerative Braking System (RBS) — Hybrid ....87
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........87
Blind Spot Monitoring .................87
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) ..........89
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . .....91
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ........95
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........95
Important Safety Precautions .............95
Seat Belt Systems ...................96
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .......105
ChildRestraints ...................118
Transporting Pets ..................134
SAFETY TIPS .....................134
Transporting Passengers ...............134
Exhaust Gas . . . ..................134
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ........................135
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
TheVehicle ......................137
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE VEHICLE ..............138
Normal Starting ....................138
After Starting .....................141
To Turn Off The Vehicle Using ENGINE
START/STOPButton ................141
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . 142
PARK BRAKE .....................143
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ..............143
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...........144
Hybrid Transmission .................145
SPEED CONTROL ..................146
ToActivate ......................146
To Set A Desired Speed ...............147
To Resume Speed ..................147
ToDeactivate ....................147
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED .....................147
ToActivate/Deactivate................148
To Set A Desired ACC Speed ............149
ToResume ......................149
To Vary The Speed Setting ..............149
Setting The Following Distance In ACC .......150
General Information .................151
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .....................151
ParkSense Sensors ..................152
ParkSense Visual Alert ................152
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........152
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ........153
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .....................154
ParkSense Sensors ..................155
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . ........155
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .....................155
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Active Park
Assist System .....................156
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ...........156
LaneSense Operation ................156
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ............157
LaneSense Warning Message ............157
Changing LaneSense Status .............158
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ......158
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED .....................159
REFUELING THE VEHICLE .............161
Materials Added To Fuel ...............163
TRAILER TOWING ..................163
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ..........164
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . . . 164
Recreational Towing — All Models .........164
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..........166
BULB REPLACEMENT ...............166
Replacement Bulbs ..................166
5
FUSES .........................168
Underhood Fuses ..................168
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .........174
Preparations For Jacking ...............174
Jacking Instructions ..................174
RoadTireInstallation .................177
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ........179
JUMP STARTING ...................184
PreparationsForJumpStart .............185
Jump Starting Procedure ...............185
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ...........186
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ..........187
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...........187
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .........188
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) .........................190
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .........190
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ..............191
Maintenance Plan ...................191
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ...........193
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — HYBRID ......194
RAISING THE VEHICLE ...............195
TIRES ..........................195
TireSafetyInformation ...............195
Tires — General Information ............202
Tire Types ......................206
Spare Tires — If Equipped ..............207
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ............209
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .......210
Treadwear ......................210
Traction Grades ...................210
Temperature Grades .................210
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ..................212
Torque Specifications ................212
FLUIDCAPACITIES .................213
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............214
Engine ........................214
Chassis ........................215
MOPAR ACCESSORIES ...............216
Authentic Accessories By Mopar ..........216
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ..................218
TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL
INFORMATION ...................219
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...........219
Reception Conditions ................219
Care And Maintenance ...............219
Anti-Theft Protection ................219
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL .............219
UCONNECT THEATER — IF EQUIPPED .....221
Uconnect Theater Overview .............221
Getting Started ...................221
Pairing The Remote . . . ..............221
Unpairing The Remote ................222
Uconnect Theater Remote Control . . . ......222
General Information .................223
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media File From
Uconnect System . . .................223
DiscMenu ......................225
Uconnect Theater Apps . . .............225
UsingTheRearVideoUSBPort...........226
Play Video Games ..................227
Headphones Operation . . .............227
DisplaySettings ...................229
Wireless Streaming — If Equipped . . . .......229
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............232
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...........232
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........232
InMexicoContact ..................232
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .......232
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired(TDD/TTY) ................233
ServiceContract ...................233
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........234
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . . . 234
In Canada ......................234
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........234
INDEX
........................235
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Multifunction Lever 7 — Glove Compartment 12 — Gear Selector
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 8 — Climate Controls 13 — Ignition
3 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Switch Panel 14 — Speed Controls
4 — Windshield Wiper Lever 10 — Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports 15 — Steering Wheel
5 — Charge Indicator 11 — Electronic Park Brake Switch 16 — Headlight Switch
6 — Uconnect System
7
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window/Door Lock Switches
2 — Door Handles
3 — Seats
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
8
HIGH VOLTAGE
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a Lithium-ion high
voltage battery that is used to power the electric
powertrain systems and the 12 volt vehicle electrical
system.
The high voltage battery is located under the
middle section of the vehicle, below and in front of
the second row seating. The high voltage battery is
maintenance free and designed to last for the life of
the vehicle.
Lithium-ion batteries provide the following ben-
efits:
• Lithium-ion batteries are much lighter than other
types of rechargeable batteries of the same size.
• Lithium-ion batteries hold their charge; they only
lose approximately 3 percent of their charge per
month.
• Lithium-ion batteries have no memory, which
means that you do not have to completely dis-
charge them before recharging, as with some
other batteries.
• Lithium-ion batteries can be recharged and dis-
charged thousands of times.
High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect
The High Voltage Battery Service Disconnect is
located under the access panel, in front of the sec-
ond row passenger seating.
If your vehicle requires high voltage battery service,
see your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Never try to remove the high voltage battery
service disconnect. The high voltage battery ser-
vice disconnect is used when your vehicle re-
quires serviced by a trained technician at an
authorized dealer. Failure to follow this warning
can cause severe burns or electrical shock that
may result in serious injury or death.
Disposal of the High Voltage Battery
Your vehicle’s high voltage battery is designed to
last the life of your vehicle. See your authorized
dealer for information on the disposal of the battery
if it should require replacement.
NOTE:
• During vehicle start up and shut down a clicking
noise may be heard from within the vehicle. When
the ignition is in the ON position, the high voltage
battery contactors inside the battery are closed to
make the stored electricity inside available for ve-
hicle use. The clicking noise heard is the sound of
these contactors as they open and close during
normal operation.
• In extreme temperatures, high or low, the High
Voltage Battery may need to be conditioned and
therefore may require the vehicle to be plugged-
in. When the vehicle is not plugged-in, the follow-
ing message, “Plug In Vehicle for Battery Condi-
tioning” might appear in the instrument cluster
display. When the High Voltage Batter y is not
ready to crank the vehicle at start up, due to con-
ditions including extreme temperatures, the mes-
sage “Battery Conditioning Leave Ignition In Run”
will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Keep the ignition in the ON/RUN position for the
battery to recover. Switch the ignition back to the
OFF position when the message disappears, and
then start the vehicle. When the “Battery Condi-
tioning Leave Ignition in Run” message is dis-
played on the instrument cluster display, do not
operate any air conditioning controls.
9
• Under cold or hot temperatures, while the vehicle
is plugged-in and the ignition is in the OFF posi-
tion, the vehicle may wake-up to pre-condition the
high voltage battery for usage.
• It is recommended that the vehicle be plugged-in
over night where possible to maximize the electric
range of the vehicle.
The message will only be displayed when the igni-
tion is in the RUN position, or if there was a failed
attempt to achieve READY state when the High
Voltage Battery cell temperatures are either too
cold, or too hot.
HIGH VOLTAGE
CHARGING OPERATION
SAE J1772 Charging Inlet
Your vehicle uses an industry standard SAE
J1772 charge inlet (vehicle charge inlet) for both AC
Level 1 (120V) and AC Level 2 (240V) charging.
AC Level 1 Charging (120V, 15 Amp)
Your vehicle is equipped with a 120 Volt AC, SAE
J1772 Level 1 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment
(EVSE), also referred to as a charging cord set. AC
Level 1 charging requires a conventional NEMA
5-15 120 Volt AC grounded wall receptacle along
with the portable charging cord set provided with
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Shock, fire, property damage, or personal injury
may occur if the Portable EVSE Cordset is not
used properly. There are no serviceable parts
contained in the Portable EVSE Cordset. Any
attempt to service it may result in shock, fire,
property damage, or personal injury.
Vehicle Charge Inlet
Portable Charging Cord Set (EVSE)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
10
To access the portable charging cord set, open the
door of the cargo area storage bin, on the driver’s
side, and remove the charging cord set from the
storage bag.
NOTE:
After use, the EVSE should be placed in the carrier
bag and put back to the cargo area storage bin.
NOTE:
The portable charging cord set is used for AC Level
1 charging only.
WARNING!
• Read all the instructions before using this
product.
• Do not put fingers or objects into the Charge
Connector.
• Do not use this product if the flexible power
cord or Electric Vehicle (EV) Cable is frayed,
broken, has cracked insulation or any other
signs of damage.
• Do not use this product if the enclosure or the
Charge Connector is broken, cracked, open,
or shows any other indication of damage.
WARNING!
• Do not use Portable EVSE Cordset with an
extension cord. Use of an extension cord may
cause burns, fire, or other damage or injury.
• This device may attempt to reset and run after
an interruption.
• There are no user serviceable parts inside the
AC Level 1 charging cord set. Do not attempt
to repair or service the charging cord set your-
self – personal injury may result.
• When using a charging station with the charg-
ing cable attached, ensure the cable is not
visibly damaged before plugging into the ve-
hicle.
• Do not allow children to operate this device.
Adult supervision is mandatory when children
are in proximity to a charge station that is in
use.
• Do not use a charge station or vehicle recep-
tacle that is worn or damaged with the AC
Level 2 charging cable. Plugging into worn or
damaged receptacles may cause damage to
the EVSE and vehicle.
• Ensure that the EVSEs are always stored in a
safe place. Do not expose them to rain or wet
conditions. Avoid allowing water or other liq-
WARNING!
uids to pour or drip on the EVSE. If water
penetrates the electrical device, the risk or
electrical shock increases. Ensure that all plugs
and cables are free of moisture before using
the EVSEs.
Charging Cordset Operation
1. Plug the AC plug of the charging cordset into a
15 A, or 20 A, 120 VAC, 60 Hz, grounded wall
receptacle. Do not use an extension cord, outlet/
plug adapter, or a worn outlet. The charging
cordset will not operate safely unless it is plugged
directly into the wall receptacle.
NOTE:
The EVSE should be plugged into a dedicated
circuit, not a circuit shared with other devices
drawing electricity on the circuit.
11
WARNING!
Improper connection of the equipment-
grounding conductor could result in a risk of
electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician
or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether
the wall receptacle is properly grounded. Do not
modify the plug provided with the product – if it
does not fit the outlet, you must have a proper
outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
2. Check to see if the charging cordset is ready to
charge by reviewing the indicator lights. After a
brief self-check, where the indicator light will
flash, a green AC indicator light and two green
“charge active” indicator lights indicate that the
cordset is ready for use.
3. If the charging cordset is ready to charge, ensure
the vehicle is in PARK, and then connect the
charge connector to the vehicle’s charge inlet.
You will hear a “click” when the charge connector
is inserted correctly and coupled with the vehi-
cle’s charge inlet.
4. When the vehicle commences charging, the
Charge Active Indicator Lights on the EVSE will
cycle from left to right, and then both turn off.
This pattern will repeat while the vehicle is
charging. The lights are illuminated at the rate of
approximately one cycle per second.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automati-
cally. If not, please check the following:
• Charging Cordset - The charging cordset sta-
tus indicators illuminate green or red to iden-
tify the charging cordset status.
• Wall Receptacle – Check whether the wall
receptacle is functional (no power outage)
and/or plug the charging cordset into a differ-
ent wall receptacle.
• Charging Schedule – Check whether or not
the charging schedules have been enabled. If
enabled, check that you are within the sched-
AC Plug And Wall Receptacle
Cordset Indicator Lights
1 — AC Power Indicator Light
2 — Fault Indicator Light
3 — Charge Rate Indicator Lights
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12
uled time and day of the week. If a charging
schedule has been enabled in the vehicle, and
it is outside the time and day of the week, you
may override the schedule for this charging
event by plugging in the charge connector,
unplugging it, and then plugging it back into
the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the double
plug sequence within ten seconds for it to
override the set schedule.
5. To stop the charging process, disconnect the
vehicle side connector first and then the charg-
ing cordset from the wall receptacle. To disen-
gage the vehicle coupler, press the button on the
charge connector first and then remove the con-
nector from the vehicle charge inlet.
6. Close the inlet door when an EVSE is not con-
nected to the vehicle.
NOTE:
It is good practice to keep the ignition in the OFF
position while conducting Level 1 Charging. This
minimizes any additional vehicle loads the EVSE
has to support. The additional electrical loads will
extent the High Voltage Battery charging time.
AC Level 2 Charging (240V, 30 Amp
Or 32 Amp)
AC Level 2 (240 V) charging requires a 240 V, Level
2 EVSE (Charging station). A 30 Amp or 32 Amp
Level 2 EVSE for home installation is recom-
mended.
When using public charging stations, ensure the
charging station is ready to provide charge and the
vehicle is in PARK before the charge connector is
plugged into the vehicle’s charge inlet. You will hear
a “click” when the charge connector is inserted cor-
rectly and is coupled with the vehicle’s charge inlet.
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the instructions at the charging
station.
NOTE:
The vehicle should start charging automatically. If
not, please check the following:
• Charging Station – Check the indications and in-
structions at the charging station or
• Charging Schedule – Check whether the charging
schedule is enabled and if so, whether the vehicle is
currently within the scheduled charge time/day
(weekday/weekend). If the charging schedule is
enabled within the vehicle, you may override them
for this charging event by plugging in the charge
connector, unplugging it, and then plugging it
back into the vehicle charge inlet. Complete the
double plug sequence within ten seconds for it to
override the set schedule.
To stop the charging process:
• Press the “STOP” button located on the front of
the EVSE station.
• Press the button on the charge connector first and
then remove the connector from the vehicle
charge inlet.
• Plug the charge handle into the EVSE station and
coil the charging cord onto its holder. Do not leave
the charging cord laying on the ground.
Charging Times
The following factors determine the time it takes to
charge the high voltage battery:
• The high voltage battery’s current state of charge
• The type of EVSE used (Level 1 - 120V or Level 2
– 240V)
• Ambient temperature
• Whether the vehicle is ON during charging
13
NOTE:
• The charging times below are estimates based on
charging a high voltage battery that has a <1%
SOC value displayed in the instrument cluster.
• Charging times will vary based on the age, condi-
tion, state of charge, available current being pro-
vided to the charger from its energy source, and
temperature of the high voltage battery.
• Charging times may be longer if a thermal self-
protection reduces the charging current from the
EVSE.
• If the vehicle’s ignition is in either the ACC or
RUN position, the vehicle charge indicator may
not indicate greater than a 99% state of charge,
and will continue to charge the vehicle, due to the
vehicle loads.
Type of EVSE
Estimated Charge
Time
Level 1 (120V/15A) Approximately 14 hours
Level 2 (240V/30A or
32A)
Approximately 2 hours
Vehicle Charge Indicators
Instrument Cluster High Voltage Battery Dis-
play
There is a battery display indicator located on the
instrument cluster. The battery display will display
the current state of charge for the high voltage
battery; with the percentage value located to the
left of the symbol. When plugged in, the batter y
symbol also gives the battery level along with mes-
sages about the charge or whether the system is
waiting to charge due to the charge schedule.
These will appear unless there is a charging fault. A
green plug telltale will be shown in the cluster, as
well as applicable messaging when charging.
Instrument Panel State Of Charge Indicator
In addition to the battery display, your vehicle is
equipped with a visual state of charge indicator. The
state of charge indicator is made up of five lights
that are mounted to the top center of the instru-
ment panel, which will illuminate when the vehicle is
plugged into the EVSE.
The state of charge indicator provides a visual indi-
cation of the high voltage battery’s charge status
during charging. It’s also used to indicate a charging
problem, as well as, waiting for a schedule charge to
begin.
High Voltage Battery Gauge
State Of Charge Indicator
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14
NOTE:
The lights scroll one at a time when the vehicle is
plugged in outside of its charging schedule time/
day of the week, and it is waiting on the schedule to
begin charging.
In the event of an error in the charging process the
outer two lights will blink.
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminated
Percent Of Battery
Charge
1st light blinks 0 – 20%
1st light ON, second
light blinks
21 – 40%
1st and 2nd lights ON,
3rd light blinks
41 – 60%
1st, 2nd, and 3rd light
ON, 4th light blinks
61 – 80%
1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
light ON, 5th light
blinks
81 – 99%
All 5 lights ON 100%
Two outer lights are
blinking
Indicates an error in the
charging process.
Number Of Indicator
Lights Illuminated
Percent Of Battery
Charge
Lights turn on one at a
time from left to right
(when looking at the
front of the vehicle)
Indicates system is wait-
ing for scheduled time in
charge schedule to begin
charging.
All lights light up, and
then turn off immedi-
ately
Indicates a successful
plug-in.
NOTE:
For each segment illuminated to indicate charging,
two different blink rates are used. A blink rate on
one 1 sec ON/ 1 sec OFF indicates that the first half
of the segment is charging. The blink rate will in-
crease to 0.5 sec ON/ 0.5 sec OFF to indicate that
the second half of the segment is charging. When
the segment is fully charged, the blinking stops and
the segment remains illuminated as charging con-
tinues.
Hybrid Electric Pages
Within your Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system is the
“Hybrid Electric Pages” App that allows you to see
your vehicle’s power flow, understand your drive
history, and set an EVSE charging schedule for your
vehicle’s high voltage battery. To access this app,
press the “Apps” button on the main menu bar of
the radio’s touch screen, and locate the “Hybrid
Electric” App. Pressing the “Hybrid Electric Pages”
App brings you to a set of three pages: Power Flow,
Driving History, and Charging Schedule.
Hybrid Electric Pages App Location
15
Power Flow
The first screen within the “Hybrid Electric Pages”
App is the Power Flow screen. The Power Flow
screen shows the current power readings for all of
the following:
• Engine - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
engine is generating. Based on vehicle operating
conditions, this power is used to: propel the ve-
hicle, provide passenger compartment heating &
cooling, power vehicle electrical loads, and charge
the High Voltage Battery. Engine operation is con-
trolled to maximize fuel economy.
• Battery - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
high voltage battery is currently providing/
absorbing. A negative kW indicates the vehicle’s
high voltage battery is charging.
• Climate - Shows the amount of power (in kW) the
climate control system is using to maintain the
current interior temperature.
Power Flow paths are indicated by the direction of
the arrows on the touchscreen.
Driving History
The second screen in the “Hybrid Electric Pages”
App is the Driving History screen. The Driving
History screen shows the miles (km) driven in both
Full Electric and Hybrid modes for both the previ-
ous week and the current week. The data is dis-
played in a bar graph: Electric Mode in teal and
Hyrbid Mode in blue.
On the bar graph, miles (km) driven on the same
day in Electric mode (battery only) are always
shown below miles (km) driven in Hybrid mode.
When one day of the week exceeds 100 miles
(160 km) driven, the values of miles (km) driven in
Electric and Hybrid modes will be listed above the
bar graph in respective colors (teal for Electric and
blue for Hybrid).
Charging Schedule
The third screen within the “Hybrid Electric Pages”
App is the Charging Schedule screen. From this
screen you can set when you want you vehicle to
charge. To do so, press the check box next to the
setting “Enable Schedule” until a check mark ap-
pears in the box, from there you can push the
‘Weekdays’ or ‘Weekends’ schedule to adjust the
start and end time of desired charging. You can also
choose “Charge Until Full” instead of choosing an
Power Flow Screen
Driving History Screen
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
16
end time, allowing the vehicle to continue to charge
for an amount of time after the start time until the
vehicle is fully charged, as long as the vehicle is
plugged in. The Charging Schedule can also be set
using the Uconnect App on your smartphone.
NOTE:
If the charging schedule is not enabled, the vehicle
will charge whenever plugged in. It is not necessary
to set up the charging schedule to charge the ve-
hicle.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is plugged in outside of the charging
schedule set in the Uconnect 4C radio, the vehicle’s
battery will not charge. Charging will only begin
immediately if the vehicle is plugged in within the
time and day of the week set in the schedule. Oth-
erwise, charging will automatically begin when the
selected charge time/day of the week occurs or
whenever the vehicle is plugged in with no charge
schedule set.
If the vehicle is turned off outside of the charging
window, a radio pop-up message will be displayed,
which provides an option to begin charging the
vehicle immediately. The pop-up message asks the
driver if they would like to “Charge Now?” and
provides other information, including the next
charging schedule start time and estimated time to
charge the battery to 100%. If within one hour of
selecting “Yes,” the vehicle is connected to a pow-
ered EVSE, the vehicle will immediately begin to
charge (temporarily ignoring any set charge sched-
ule). To fully deactivate the charge schedule, refer
to the “Charging Schedule” feature within the “Hy-
brid Electric Pages” App.
The charging schedule can also be overridden if the
EVSE is plugged in, unplugged, and then plugged
in a second time to the vehicle. This “double
plugged-in” feature will override the schedule that is
set in the radio, and begin charging the vehicle
immediately. The double plug sequence must be
completed within ten seconds for it to override the
programed schedule.
If charge to full is selected, and the vehicle is
plugged in after the start time of the schedule, the
vehicle will start charging when it reaches the start
time the next day. If you would like to begin charg-
ing immediately, and continue charging until the
vehicle is fully charged, you can select the “Charge
Now” option.
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push
button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry
system uses a receiver module in the vehicle that
wirelessly links with the key fob.
Charging Schedule Screen
17
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless sig-
nal.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate, activate the Panic Alarm, optional
power liftgate, left power sliding door, and right
power sliding door from distances up to approxi-
mately 66 ft (20 m) using a key fob. When any
button on the key fob is pushed, or when any signal
is being transferred between the key fob and the
vehicle, an LED light on the key fob will flash as an
indicator. The key fob does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/
unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep
the emergency key with you when valet parking.
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully
depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which
will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
• A low key fob battery condition may be indicated
by a message in the instrument cluster display, or
by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob
light no longer illuminates from key fob button
pushes, then the key fob battery requires replace-
ment.
• The key fob LED light brightness is designed for
indoor light viewing, so the LED light may not be
visible in direct sunlight.
In a situation where the battery is low or fully de-
pleted, a back up method can be used to operate
the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob
(side opposite of the Emergency Key) against the
ENGINE START/STOP button and push to oper-
ate the ignition switch.
Key Fob
1 — LED Light
2 — Lock
3 — Remote Start
4 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
5 — Panic Alarm
6 — Emergency Key
7 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
8 — Liftgate
9 — Unlock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
18
To Unlock The Doors
NOTE:
Uconnect Settings lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver's side doors on the first push
(default) or unlock all doors on the first push of the
unlock button on the key fob. To change the default
setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver front door and sliding door
or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and
liftgate. The hazard lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will
be activated.
2nd Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and
liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowl-
edge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry sys-
tem will be activated.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry; refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Getting
To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Emergency Key Feature
The key fob also contains an emergency key. The
emergency key is stored in the bottom of the key
fob.
First Push Unlock Second Push Unlock
19
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go
dead. The emergency key is also for locking/
unlocking the glove compartment. You can keep
the emergency key with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, press the mechani-
cal button on the side of the key fob with your
thumb and pull the emergency key out with your
other hand while pushing the mechanical button.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to
lock all doors and liftgate. The hazard lights will
flash once and the horn will chirp once to acknowl-
edge the signal. Settings in radio can change to
lights only, chirp only, or both.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
Key Fob With Remote Control And Integrated
Vehicle Key
If one or more doors are open or the liftgate is open,
the doors can be locked. This is signaled by a quick
flash of the turn signals.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors can be locked. The doors will un-
lock again only if the key is inside the passenger
compartment.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Ignition, always remember to place
the ignition in the OFF position.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of pro-
gramming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics.
A blank key fob is one that has never been pro-
grammed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Mechanical Latch To Release Emergency
Key
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
20
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the
ability to customize vehicle settings that can be
applied to determine the driving experience for
other drivers of the vehicle. The vehicle settings are
protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the vehicle
owner creates when accessing the specific settings
for the first time.
This feature also has additional features that are
always enabled when the specific key is in use that
cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While this spe-
cific key fob is in use, the vehicle will respond ac-
cordingly to the customized vehicle settings and
mandatory features. This includes enhanced driving
assistance features, increased driver alerts, and the
locking of certain optional features.
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should in-
form the driver that the vehicle will be functioning in
KeySense mode when the KeySense key is in use.
Start Up Display Features
• Unique splash screen graphic
• Telltale
illuminated
• After unique splash screen, and after stored mes-
sages are cycled, then start-up KeySense mes-
sages (Range & Max Speed) are displayed
The following features are always enabled when this
key is in use:
• Entertainment Audio Muted if 1st row occupied
Seat Belts are not Fastened
• Consistent Seat Belt Unfastened Chime
• Maximum Radio Volume limited to 15 out of 39
• Daytime Running Lights
• Headlights with Wipers
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
• Auto Dim High Beams
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this ve-
hicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
21
IGNITION SWITCH
This feature allows the driver to start the vehicle
with the push of a button, as long as the key fob is in
the passenger compartment, and the drivers foot
on the brake pedal.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shut-
down feature. If the vehicle is left in “READY” state
(vehicle running) with shifter in “PARK” for one
hour, it will automatically turn off the vehicle. Noti-
fications have been designed into this feature to
raise awareness of the timed event. The instrument
cluster display will display “Ready to drive” accom-
panied with three audible chimes while exiting. The
interior warnings will occur regardless if the key fob
remains in the vehicle or is removed. The horn will
sound three times if the fob is removed from the
vehicle and the ignition state is in “READY” mode.
To restart the vehicle, follow the normal process for
starting your vehicle.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operat-
ing positions; three of which are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. The three positions are
OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
START: during start, the RUN indicator will illumi-
nate.
NOTE:
• Pushing ignition Start/Stop button may only acti-
vate the Electric Propulsion System and not start
the vehicle’s engine (if running the engine is not
currently required by the Hybrid system).
"READY" will show in cluster whenever vehicle is
operating in EV (Electric Vehicle) Mode and the
vehicle is stationary.
• If the vehicle ignition is in either ACC or RUN, the
vehicle charge indicator may not display a value
greater than 99% state of charge due to vehicle
loads.
The ignition can be placed in the following posi-
tions:
OFF
• The vehicle is stopped.
• Some electrical devices are available.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
22
ACC
• Some electrical devices are available.
• Mechanical power (Vehicle Propulsion) is not
available.
ON/RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
• As long as the "READY" appears in the instru-
ment cluster display it does not matter if the en-
gine is running or not, vehicle propulsion is
available.
NOTE:
Vehicle propulsion is only available after the vehicle
has passed through the START position.
Conditions Causing Engine To Run
• Maintaining Hybrid Battery SOC
• Provide Maximum Vehicle Acceleration
• Provide Maximum Passenger Compartment
Heating
• Maintain Exhaust System Catalyst Temperature
(after engine start in current ignition cycle - emis-
sions requirement)
• Engine Temporarily Operating in “Fuel and Oil
Maintenance Mode”
• Hood Opened with Ignition in Run Post-Start
Mode (eliminate unexpected engine start-ups)
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button
and push to operate the ignition switch.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a ve-
hicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
23
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always re-
move the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
If the brake is pressed and the ignition is placed in
the RUN position with an EVSE connected to the
vehicle, the instrument cluster will not display the
Ready state. When the Electric Vehicle Supply
Equipment (EVSE) is unplugged from the vehicle,
the vehicle will go into the “Ready” state. If the
vehicle is not shifted out of Park 30 minutes after
being unplugged, the vehicle will disable the
“Ready” state. After an additional 30 minutes with
no change in Ignition status, the Ignition shall go to
OFF and the vehicle shall power down. For further
information, refer to "Starting The Vehicle" in
"Starting And Operating" for further information.
REMOTE STARTING
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Remote start on Hybrid while plugged in may
not always start the engine.
This system uses the key fob to start the vehicle
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the Cli-
mate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in tem-
peratures above 80° F (26.7° C), the optional
heated seats, optional heated steering wheel, op-
tional heated mirrors and rear defroster in tempera-
tures below 40° F (4.4° C).
NOTE:
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range.
• While plugged in the remote start feature for the
vehicle may not always start the engine.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before
the vehicle will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• 12 volt battery at an acceptable charge level
• Key fob PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start
event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• MIL lamp is OFF, Vehicle is in propulsion system
active
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
24
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas con-
tains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odor-
less and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poi-
sonous and can cause serious injury or death
when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause se-
rious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors
will lock, the turn signals will flash twice, and the
horn will chirp twice. Then the vehicle will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for
a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The vehicle can be started two consecutive times
(two 15-minute cycles) from the key fob. However,
the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before any additional remote start requests
can be received.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this ve-
hicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY
ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch
for unauthorized operation. When the alarm is acti-
vated, the interior switches for door locks, power
sliding doors and power liftgate are disabled. The
vehicle security alarm provides both audible and
visible signals. If something triggers the alarm, the
vehicle security alarm will provide the following au-
dible and visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the vehicle
security light in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the
“OFF ” position (refer to "Starting The Engine"
in "Starting And Operating" for further
information).
25
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry, make sure the vehicle
ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door
open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone (refer to "Key-
less Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in "Get-
ting To Know Your Vehicle" for further
information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle securit y alarm can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
equipped, refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Pas-
sive Entry" under "Getting To Know Your Vehicle"
for further information).
• Hands Free Liftgate passive entry activation (if
equipped with Hands Free Liftgate passive entry).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
– For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go — Passive Entry, push the keyless ig-
nition START/STOP button (requires at
least one valid key fob in the vehicle).
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during
power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button
will not disarm the vehicle security alarm. If some-
one enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
opens any door, the alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of
the previously described arming sequences has oc-
curred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless
of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you
remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm
will remain armed when the battery is reconnected;
the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound.
If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
26
DOORS
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a fea-
ture of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Re-
fer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a
slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will
re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
• The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the
outside using the hands free or Passive Entry sys-
tem.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle passive entry system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop, wireless charging pad, or
other electronic device; these devices may block
the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the pas-
sive entry handle from locking/unlocking the ve-
hicle.
• If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings,
unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illumi-
nated approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for the time 0, 30 (default), 60, or
90 seconds. Passive Entry also initiates two flashes
of the turn lamps.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver’s
door handle, grab the driver’s front door handle to
unlock the drivers side doors (driver/sliding door)
automatically. The interior door panel rocker knob
will rotate when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors and liftgate will unlock when you grab hold of
the driver’s front door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
27
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger
door handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will
rotate when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Key Fob In
Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally lock-
ing a key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock
feature.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive
Entry. There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a
door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be ex-
ecuted. If it finds a key fob inside the car, and it does
not find any key fob outside the car, then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no valid
key fob is detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle
will not unlock the doors when any of the following
conditions are met:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid key fob outside the vehicle and
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door
handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using
the door panel switch and then close the doors.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the
key fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate,
cycle the handle to open the liftgate and pull the
liftgate open with one fluid motion.
NOTE:
If “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is programmed,
only the liftgate will unlock when the liftgate release
handle is pulled. If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
programmed, all doors and the liftgate will unlock
when the liftgate release handle is pulled. To select
between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Un-
lock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the driver or passenger front door handle, push
the door handle lock button to lock all four doors
and the liftgate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
28
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked
by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle
reacting and unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
key fob lock button, or the lock button located on
the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this ve-
hicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Do Not Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
29
Power Sliding Side Door —
If Equipped
The power sliding door may be power opened or
closed in several ways:
• Key fob
• Inside or outside handles
• Buttons located:
– In the overhead console
– Just inside the sliding door
– On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to open, close, or reverse a power sliding
door.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
operate the door when the door is locked. All other
ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the
button on the outside handle or Hands-Free feature
(if equipped) will unlock and open the sliding door,
with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the door handle.
Key Fob Left Side Control Buttons Key Fob Right Side Control Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
30
There are power sliding side door switches located
on the B-Pillar trim panel, just in front of the power
sliding door for the rear seat passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the
handles or to avoid unintentional operation of the
power sliding doors from the rear seats, push the
power sliding door power off button, located in the
overhead console, to remove power to the handles
and buttons just inside the sliding doors. The power
off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit when the
handles are manual. When the LED is lit, pushing
the power sliding door power off button will return
the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open position
and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets
sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with
sliding door movements.
•
If the power sliding door stops in the middle due to
obstacles, it will power open on the next command.
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the sliding door. Make sure
the door path is clear before closing the door.
WARNING!
Before driving off, check the instrument cluster
for a sliding door or door open message or warn-
ing indicator. Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the sliding door open
while driving.
Hands-Free Sliding Doors —
If Equipped
To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors, use a
straight in and out kicking motion under the vehicle
in the general location below the door handle(s).
Do not move your foot sideways or in a sweeping
motion or the sensors may not detect the motion.
Overhead Console Control Buttons
Hands-Free Sliding Doors
31
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the slid-
ing door will chime, the hazard lights will flash and
the sliding door will open almost instantaneously.
This assumes all options are enabled in the radio
settings.
NOTE:
• To open the Hands-Free Sliding Doors requires a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not
within 5 ft (1.5 m), the door will not respond to any
kicks.
• The Hands-Free Sliding Door will only operate
when the transmission is in PARK.
• With every movement of the Hands-Free sliding
doors, an audible tone will sound and the turn
signals will flash. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information on turning these alerts on or off.
• If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open position
and an audible tone will sound, provided it meets
sufficient resistance. The turn signals will flash with
sliding door movements.
• If the power sliding doors encounters multiple ob-
structions within the same cycle, the system will
automatically stop.
The Hands-Free Sliding Doors feature may be
turned off through Uconnect Settings. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information. The Hands-Free
Sliding Doors feature should be turned off during
Jacking, Tire Changing, and Vehicle Service.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the sliding doors are
equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock sys-
tem.
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child
Protection Door Lock control inward (toward
the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding
door.
NOTE:
• After engaging (or disengaging) the Child Pro-
tection Door Lock, always test the inside door
handle with the sliding door closed to make certain
the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired
position. The inside door handle will not open the
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock
is engaged.
• The power sliding door will operate from the
switch located just inside the sliding door, regard-
less of the Child Protection Door Lock lever posi-
tion.
Child Protection Door Locks
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
32
• To avoid unintentional operation of the power
sliding door from the rear seats, push the Slid-
ing Door Power Off button, located in the over-
head console. When the overhead console power
OFF LED is lit, the sliding door may not be power
opened or closed by pushing the buttons just in-
side the sliding doors or pulling on the handles.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a colli-
sion. Remember that the sliding doors cannot be
opened from the inside door handle when the
Child Protection Door Locks are engaged.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control
outward (away from the vehicle) to disengage
the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding
door.
NOTE:
• After disengaging (or engaging) the Child Pro-
tection Door Lock, always test the inside door
handle with the sliding door closed to make certain
the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired
position. The inside door handle will open the
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock
is disengaged.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people rid-
ing in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Manual Ad justment (Rear Seats)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the ve-
hicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
Fold-Flat
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full
upward position and push the seatback forward until
it rests on the seat cushion.
NOTE:
The seatback may lock into the fold flat position.
Use the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
33
Easy Entry Slide Second Row Seating
The second row seats can be tilted and slid forward
for easy entry into the third row.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row seat is
a lever that provides easier access to the third
row by tilting the seat for ward.
2. Slide lever upwards to unlock the seatback.
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to access
the third row.
4. To put the seat back into original position, just
pull back on the seatback and lock the seat into
position.
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat.
Serious injury or death my occur.
Second Row Removable Seat
The Easy Entry Slide second row seating does not
stow in the floor, but they are removable for added
cargo space.
Removing Seat
1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position.
2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat
against the seat cushion.
NOTE:
Push downward on the seatback to make sure it
is in the locked position.
3. The release strap is located on the front of the
seat, near the floor.
4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
release the rear latches.
5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward position.
6. The seat assembly can now be removed from
the vehicle. Grab the front seatback edge lo-
cated near the head restraint and the grab bar on
the rear side of the seat cushion for easy
removal.
Easy Tilt Lever
Seat Release Strap
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
34
Reinstalling Seat
1. To reinstall the seat, align the seat’s front attach-
ments into the detent positions on the floor.
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its
original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in
the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back to
the seating position.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats — If
Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the
seatback by pushing the button on the guide and
pushing the head restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the
anchors.
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the seat
rearward into the storage bin.
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat for ward until the
anchors latch.
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to return
to its full upright position.
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always be
sure the seats are fully latched.
• Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
head restraints are in their upright positions
when the seat is to be occupied.
Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped
The Memory Buttons (1) and (2) on the driver's
door panel can be programmed to recall the driver's
seat, outside mirrors, and radio station preset set-
tings. Your key fobs can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the unlock button is
pushed.
Your vehicle may have been delivered with two key
fobs, one key fob can be linked to each of the
memory positions.
Driver Memory Switch
35
Programming The Memory Feature
To create a new memory profile, perform the fol-
lowing:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN po-
sition (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors
and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of
the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument
cluster display will show which memory position
has been set.
NOTE:
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
• To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to
“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless En-
try Key Fob To Memory” in this section.
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of
two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing
the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature
through the Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual
for further information.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set,
refer to "Programming The Memory Feature"
in this section for instructions on how to set a
memory profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory set-
tings by pushing the set (S) button, and within
10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button
on the key fob.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE:
The vehicle speed must be less than or equal to
5 mph (8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a
recall is attempted when the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one, push
memory button (1) on the driver's door or the un-
lock button on the key fob linked to memory posi-
tion 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, push
memory button (2) on the driver's door or the
unlock button on the key fob linked to memory
position 2.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
36
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the
memory buttons on the driver's door during a recall
(S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver's
seat stops moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
NOTE:
Pushing the mirror adjust switch will cancel the
memory mirror recall.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With
Memory Seat Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat posi-
tioning to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when you
cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
• When the ignition is cycled to the OFF position,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm)
rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when the ignition is cycled out of the OFF
position.
• When the ignition is cycled to the OFF position,
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches
(7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver seat
position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7 –
67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
return to its previously set position when the igni-
tion is cycled out of the OFF position.
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when
the driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches
(22.7 mm) for ward of the rear stop. At this posi-
tion, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the
seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
Each stored memory setting will have an associated
Easy Entry and Easy Exit Position.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or
disabled through the programmable features within
the Uconnect system. For further information, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual.
Heated Seats
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located
within the climate or controls screen of the touch-
screen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat settings.
The indicator lights in each switch indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the
HI setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to
turn the LO setting on.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to
turn the heating elements off.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after approxi-
mately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicat-
ing the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF
automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
• The vehicle must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
37
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on dur-
ing a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner's Manual for further
information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, dia-
betes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion or other physical condition
must exercise care when using the seat heater.
It may cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the first row seat cushions are small fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment
and move air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger
cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans
operate at two speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are lo-
cated within the climate or controls screen of the
touchscreen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to
choose HI.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time
to choose LO.
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be running for the ventilated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ventilated seats can be programed to come on
during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
Ad justable Armrest (Front Seats) —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with armrests on the
front seats. To adjust, push and hold the button
while moving to the desired position. Release the
button once the desired position is reached.
Adjustable Armrest
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
38
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so
that the top of the head restraint is located above
the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted or
removed could cause serious injury or death in
the event of a collision.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped
with four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the ad-
justment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Front head restraints are also adjustable forward
and rearward. To adjust the head restraint forward,
pull forward on the top of the head restraint to
desired position. To adjust the head restraint rear-
ward, pull forward on the head restraint to furthest
forward position and head restraint will reset to
furthest rearward position.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
Forward Adjustment
39
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go. Then, push the release button and the adjust-
ment button at the base of each post while pulling
the head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to
be adjusted to fully remove the head restraint. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
ad just the head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious in-
jury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Al-
ways securely stow removed head restraints in
a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the occu-
pants. Follow the re-installation instructions
above prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat.
Head Restraints — Second Row
The second row outboard head restraints are ad-
justable. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the release button and the adjustment
button at the base of each post while pulling the
head restraint up. Seatback angle may need to be
ad justed to fully remove the head restraint. To rein-
stall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then, adjust the
head restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious in-
jury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Al-
ways securely stow removed head restraints in
a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the occu-
pants. Follow the re-installation instructions
above prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat.
Second Row Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually
folded forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull
the release strap to fold them forward.
NOTE:
• The head restraints must be raised manually when
occupying the third row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be
raised and lowered for tether routing or height ad-
justment. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far as
it can go. Then, push the release button and the
ad justment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes
and push downward. Then, using the ad justment
button, adjust the head restraint to the appropriate
height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the re-installation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Release Strap
Center Head Restraint
1 — Adjustment Button
2 — Release Button
41
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping
lever is located left of the steering wheel at the end
of the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or down-
ward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering
column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it
inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Ad justing the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in seri-
ous injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element that
helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel has only one temperature setting.
Once the heated steering wheel has been turned
on, it will operate for an average of 80 minutes or
more before automatically shutting off. This time
may vary depending on the temperature of the
environment. The heated steering wheel can shut
off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel
is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to
the control button through the climate screen or the
controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once
to turn the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be running for the heated steering
wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come
on during a remote start through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, dia-
betes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol
use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
42
WARNING!
must exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long peri-
ods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
MIRRORS
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R
(right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, pushing the switch a second time will return
the mirrors to the normal driving position.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the folding feature will be disabled.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
they will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: fold and unfold
them by pushing the button (this may require mul-
tiple button pushes). This resets them to their nor-
mal position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
43
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column. The multifunction lever con-
trols the turn signals, headlight high/low beams, and
flash-to-pass functions.
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. The switch controls the op-
eration of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, interior lights and the fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the second
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the third
detent for headlight, parking light and instrument
panel operation.
Daytime Running Lights —
If Equipped
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle
will illuminate when the vehicle is started. This pro-
vides a constant lights on condition until the ignition
is turned OFF. If the parking brake is applied, the
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if
a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same
side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the
turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
High/Low Beam Switch
When the headlights are turned on, pushing the
multifunction lever toward the instrument panel will
switch from low beams to high beams. Pulling back
to the neutral position returns the headlights to the
low beam operation.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Ambient Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
4 — Fog Lamps Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
44
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam system provides in-
creased forward lighting at night by automating
high beam control through the use of a digital cam-
era mounted on the windshield. This camera de-
tects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and tail-
lights of vehicles in the field of view will cause head-
lights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle).
Also, dirt, film and other obstructions on the wind-
shield or camera lens will cause the system to func-
tion improperly.
To Activate
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — ON” through
the Uconnect system. Refer to "Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual
for further information.
2. Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
AUTO position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you to
switch the headlights to the high beam position.
Refer to “Multifunction Lever” for further
information.
NOTE:
This system will not activate until the vehicle is at, or
above 16 mph (25 km/h).
To Deactivate
Perform either of the following steps to deactivate
the Automatic High Beam system.
1. Select “Automatic High Beams — OFF” through
the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual
for further information.
2. Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch
the headlights from the high beam to the low
beam position.
3. Rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise
from the AUTO to the on position.
NOTE:
Once active, the Automatic High Beam system will
stop functioning below 12 mph (20 km/h).
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns your headlights on
or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme
clockwise position aligning the indicator with the
AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is
on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on.
This means your headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF.
To turn the Automatic System off, turn the head-
light switch counterclockwise to the O (off) posi-
tion.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.
45
Headlights On With Wipers —
If Equipped
When your headlights are in the AUTO mode and
the vehicle is running, the headlights will automati-
cally turn on when the wiper system is also turned
on. Headlights on when windshield wipers are on
may be found on vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic headlight system.
NOTE:
The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned
on or off through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
Headlight Delay — If Equipped
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumi-
nation for up to 90 seconds after exiting your ve-
hicle.
To activate the delay feature, turn the ignition OFF
while the headlights are still on. The 90 second
delay interval begins when headlight switch is
turned off. If the headlights or parking lights are
turned back on or the ignition switch is turned ON,
the delay will be cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 sec-
onds or not remain on. To change the timer setting,
select the proper setting through the Uconnect
System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within 45 sec-
onds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
feature.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push in the
headlight switch control knob. Pushing the head-
light switch control knob in a second time will turn
the front fog lights off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash
to show proper operation of the front and rear turn
signal lights.
Fog Light Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
46
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there
is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever
is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn
signals on, a chime will sound and a message will
display in the cluster to alert the driver.
WINDSHIELD WIPER
AND WASHERS
Front Wiper Operation
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
within the wiper lever. Rotate the end of the lever
upward, to the first detent past the intermittent
settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the
end of the lever upward to the second detent past
the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper op-
eration.
NOTE:
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned
off and the blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
WARNING!
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden ic-
ing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause
between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the
wiper lever to the first detent position, and then turn
the end of the lever to select the desired delay
interval. There are four delay settings, which allow
you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of
one cycle every second to a maximum of approxi-
mately 36 seconds between cycles. The delay inter-
vals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward
you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pulled while on the intermittent setting, the wipers
will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the lever is released, and then resume the intermit-
Washer And Wiper Controls
47
tent interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled
while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers
will operate several wipe cycles, then turn off.
Mist Feature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the
lever upward to the MIST position and release for a
single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the wind-
shield and automatically activates the wipers for the
driver. This feature is especially useful for road
splash or overspray from the windshield washers of
the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to one of the four intermittent wiper
sensitivity settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the
multifunction lever. Wiper sensitivity position 3 has
been calibrated for best overall wiping sensitivity. If
the operator desires more wiping sensitivity, they
may select sensitivity position 4. If the operator
desires less wiping sensitivity, they may select sen-
sitivity positions 2 or 1. Place the multifunction lever
in the OFF position when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper speed is in the low or high position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
cone may reduce rain sensor performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
through the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for
the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under
the following conditions:
• Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition
is first switched ON, when the vehicle is stationary
and the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C),
unless the wiper control on the multifunction lever
is moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than
3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature rises
above freezing.
• Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature
will not operate when the ignition is ON, when the
transmission gear selector is in the NEUTRAL
position and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h), unless the wiper control on the multi-
function lever is moved, the vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the ve-
hicle is in the remote start mode. Once the opera-
tor is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition
switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper
operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously)
exist.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
48
Rear Wiper And Washer
Rear Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring up-
wards to operate one of two modes for the rear
window wiper:
• First detent — intermittent mode.
• Second detent — continuous mode.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates
the rear window washer. If the lever is pushed while
on the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the lever is pushed while the
wipers are in the off position, the wipers will operate
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circu-
lating throughout the vehicle. The controls are lo-
cated on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Automatic Climate Controls
The front controls are located on the touchscreen
(if equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio. The rear climate controls are located on
the touchscreen and in the rear headliner, on the
passenger side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Heating and A/C are only available with the vehicle
running, unless the vehicle is plugged in.
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV with 8.4–inch
display Automatic Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Controls On The
Faceplate
49
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavail-
able (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the
system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing this function will cause the
ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
50
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An
indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Rear Climate
Rear Climate Control Button
Press and release this button to access the rear climate controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear climate controls are on.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press
and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button on
the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler tempera-
ture settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is en-
abled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
MODE
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the blower with arrow up icon to reduce the blower setting and the blower with arrow up icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
51
Icon Description
Modes Control
MODE
Modes Control Knob
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
The airflow distribution mode can be ad justed so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut
off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window de-
mister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that re-
quire extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
52
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the op-
erator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning sys-
tem is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin. For improved
fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and
airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only
Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active
to prevent fogging of the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an
accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle
water spray from the front of the radiator and
through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and
the prior settings. The button illuminates when
MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing
other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on the touch-
screen greyed out) if conditions exist that could
create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC Panel
and the word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front
ATC display, along with two temperatures for the
driver and front passenger. The system will then
automatically regulate the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the sys-
tem to maintain, by adjusting the driver, passen-
ger, and rear temperatures. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level,
it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply al-
lowing the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
53
To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto-
matic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan
will remain on low until the engine warms up. The
fan will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
selected, or by changing the front blower knob
setting.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From
The Front ATC Touchscreen
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjust-
ment of the rear climate controls from the front
ATC touchscreen.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the "REAR CLIMATE" button on the
touchscreen to change control to rear control
mode, rear display appears. Control functions now
operate rear system.
• To return to the front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the "Front Climate" on the
touchscreen.
Icon Description
REAR AUTO
Rear Auto Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function causes
the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Rear Lock Button
Press and release to lock out the rear manual temperature controls from adjusting the rear temperature and blower settings.
Front Climate Button
Press and release this button to change the display on the Uconnect system back to the Front Climate Controls.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Front ATC Panel
Rear Control Display
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
54
Icon Description
Rear Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button on the touchscreen to increase the tem-
perature. Push the down arrow button on the touchscreen to decrease the temperature. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature moves up and down with the driver’s temperature.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the front and rear passenger temperature settings with the driver temperature setting. Changing
the front or rear passenger temperature setting while in SYNC exits this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjust-
ing the blower causes automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
Rear Passenger Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Panel Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and out-
board outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes
to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
55
Icon Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air comes from the instru-
ment panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to change the air distribution mode to Floor Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the floor outlets.
A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
— If Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets under-
neath the passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at
each outboard rear seating position. The system
provides heated air through the floor outlets or
cool, dehumidified air through the headliner out-
lets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear
ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock but-
ton is turned off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and the
rear modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
ATC System will automatically achieve and main-
tain that comfort level. When the system is set up
for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change
the settings. You will experience the greatest effi-
ciency by simply allowing the system to function
automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature set-
tings. The system automatically adjusts the tem-
perature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
56
Icon Description
Rear Mode Control
Push this button on the Rear Climate Hard Controls to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers to one of the following:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of
the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Rear Temperature Control
• Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control up button to raise
the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
•
Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, push temperature control down button
to lower the temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed in control head.
57
Icon Description
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control can be manually set to off, or any fixed blower speed by pushing the blower control buttons. This allows the rear seat
occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases blower speed, whereas the
smaller of the two icons decreases the blower speed.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the
system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Rear Climate Control/Blower Off
To manually set the rear blower controls to off, press the Rear Climate Control/Blower Off button.
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) with deionized, or distilled water for
proper corrosion protection is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system
is functioning properly and the proper amount,
type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of
the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is
not recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run
the air conditioning system at idle for about five
minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high.
This will ensure adequate system lubrication to
minimize the possibility of compressor damage
when the system is started again.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
58
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows,
select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front
blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode
without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause dam-
age to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window clean-
ers on the interior surface of the window. Use
a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wip-
ing parallel to the heating elements. Labels
can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior sur-
face of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce
airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could
plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure
the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pol-
len from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
You can control either the front or rear windows
using controls located on the driver's door trim
panel.
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power win-
dow controls.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
1 — Front Driver And Passenger Window
Controls
2 — Rear Passenger Window Controls
3 — Power Window Lockout Switch — If
Equipped
59
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been
turned to OFF, depending upon the accessory de-
lay setting. Opening a front door will cancel this
feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s
door trim panel which operates the passenger door
window and a set of controls that lock and unlock all
doors. The controls will operate only when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
If Equipped
The front driver and front passenger controls may
be equipped with an Auto Up feature. Lift the
window control fully upward to the second detent,
release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during
the Auto Up operation, push down on the control
briefly.
To close the window part way,lift the window control
to the first detent and release when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
control again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the con-
trol lightly to the first detent and hold to close
window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the win-
dow is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be
sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers and all
objects from the window path before closing.
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control —
If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the
sliding door window by a single control on the door
handle assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has acti-
vated the Power Window Lockout.
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open, stop-
ping several inches above the window sill.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
60
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in
the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof(if equipped)
in certain open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear
windows are open and buffeting occurs, open the
front and rear windows together to minimize the
buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof
open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF
— IF EQUIPPED
The Panoramic Sunroof switch is located to the left
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
The Power Shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly se-
cured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Panoramic Sunroof And Power Shade
Switches
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
61
Opening Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch rearward and release it within one
second. The sunroof will open automatically from
any position and stop at the full open position. This
is called “Express Open.” During Express Open
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
open switch is pushed, the sunshade will automati-
cally cycle to the halfway open position prior to the
sunroof opening.
Manual Mode
Push and hold the switch rearward and the sunroof
will open to the full open position. Any release of
the switch will stop the movement. The sunroof will
remain in a partially opened condition until the
sunroof switch is pushed again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the "Vent" button within one sec-
ond and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called “Express Vent”, and it will occur re-
gardless of sunroof position.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when the
vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automati-
cally cycle to the halfway open position prior to the
sunroof opening to the Vent position.
Closing Sunroof
Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within one
second and the sunroof will close automatically
from any position. The sunroof will close fully and
stop automatically. This is called “Express Close.”
During Express Close operation, any other actua-
tion of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partially closed condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Power Sun Shade — If Equipped
The sunshade has two programmed open positions:
half-open and full-open. When opening the sun-
shade from the closed position, the sunshade will
always stop at the half-open position regardless of
express or manual open operation. The switch must
be actuated again to continue to the full-open po-
sition.
Opening Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
within one second and the sunshade will open to the
half-open position and stop automatically. Push and
release the switch again from the half-open position
and the sunshade will open to the full-open position
and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express open operation, any move-
ment of the sunshade switch will stop the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward and the
shade will open to the half-open position and stop
automatically. Push and hold the sunshade switch
rearward again and the shade will open automati-
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
62
cally to the full-open position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the sunshade will
remain in a partially opened condition until the
switch is pushed again.
Closing Power Shade — Express Mode
Push the switch forward and release it within one
second and the shade will close automatically from
any position. If the sunroof is completely closed the
shade will close fully and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Close”. During Express Close op-
eration, any other actuation of the switch will stop
the shade.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to the
half-open position. Pushing the shade close button
again will automatically close both the sunroof and
shade completely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop
the movement and the shade will remain in a par-
tially closed condition until the switch is pushed
again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing
of the sunroof during the Express Close operation.
If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is de-
tected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Re-
move the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in
Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable
and the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the OFF/LOCK position. Open-
ing either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
HOOD
Opening
WARNING!
Always cycle the ignition to OFF mode before
opening the hood. If the ignition is in ON mode
and the Propulsion System is active when the
hood is opened, the engine will automatically
start, and persons not clear of the vehicle could
be injured by the engine’s moving parts.
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch)
and safety latch (to open the secondary latch) must
be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
63
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the
passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch is
located behind the center front edge of the
hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab
and insert it into the seat located on the under-
side of the hood.
NOTE:
• Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms
are not in motion and not in the lifted position.
• While lifting the hood, use both hands.
• Vehicle must be at a stop and the automatic trans-
mission must be in park.
• If the vehicle was actively charging the HV battery
when the hood was opened, the vehicle will stop
charging until the hood is closed.
Closing
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the
other hand remove the support rod from its seat
and reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop
it. Make sure that the hood is completely closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle stopped charging the HV battery
when the hood was opened, the vehicle will resume
charging when the hood closes.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
Hood Release Lever
Safety Latch Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
64
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Opening
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to release the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pulling
the outside handle will unlock and release the lift-
gate, with a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate.
NOTE:
If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “All Doors” is pro-
grammed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will unlock
with a Passive Entry handle activation. If 1st Press of
key fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed in
Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will only unlock with
handle activation. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
Closing
To Close The Liftgate
Grasp the liftgate closing handle and initiate lower-
ing the liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate
takes over the closing effort.
To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button
located to the right of the outside handle will lock
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi-
sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by these
fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are
operating the vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and
the climate control blower switch is set at high
speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry
65
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in
several ways:
• Overhead console liftgate button
• Key fob
• Outside handle (opens liftgate only)
• Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left trim
(when liftgate is open)
• Hands-Free Liftgate (opens liftgate only) — If
Equipped
Using the above ways:
• When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will
open
• When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close
• When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the Overhead
Console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open or close the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, de-
pressing the touch pad on the outside handle or
Hands-Free Liftgate foot activation (if equipped)
will unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate
handle.
NOTE:
• To open the liftgate, the Hands-Free Liftgate foot
activation (if equipped) requires a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
• If 1st Press of key fob Unlocks “All Doors” is pro-
grammed in Uconnect Settings, all doors will un-
lock with a Passive Entry hands-free activation. If
1st Press of key fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-
grammed in Uconnect Settings, the liftgate will
only unlock with hands-free activation.
• Tones are sounded and the turn signals are flashed
with liftgate movements. These alerts can be
turned on or off in Uconnect Settings.
• Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual for further information.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear Inte-
rior Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located in
the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
66
Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the liftgate, pushing the passive entry lock button
located to the right of the outside handle will lock
the vehicle.
Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped
To open the liftgate using hands-free activation, use
a straight in and out kicking motion under the ve-
hicle activation zone in the general location below
the liftgate door handle. Do not move your foot
sideways or in a sweeping motion or the sensors may
not detect the motion.
When a valid kicking motion is completed, the lift-
gate will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the
liftgate will open after approximately one second.
This assumes all options are enabled in the radio.
NOTE:
To open the Hands-Free Liftgate requires a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle. If a valid Passive Entry key fob is not within
5 ft (1.5 m), the liftgate will not respond to any kicks.
CAUTION!
The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned
on or off in Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual
for further information. The Hands-Free Liftgate
feature should be turned off during Jacking, Tire
Changing, and Vehicle Service.
NOTE:
• The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when
the transmission is in Park.
• If anything obstructs the Hands-Free liftgate while
it is opening, the liftgate will automatically reverse
to the closed position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
• There are pinch sensors attached to the side of the
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along
these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the
open position.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstruc-
tions within the same cycle, the system will auto-
matically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be
operated manually.
• The power liftgate will release, but not power
open, in temperatures below −12° F (−24° C). Be
sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the
liftgate before opening the liftgate.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended period of
time, the liftgate may need to be closed manually
to reset power liftgate functionality.
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
67
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi-
sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by these
fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are
operating the vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set at
high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tem-
perature, it may be necessary to assist the props
when opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Manu-
ally pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the
liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the
power operation or reverse its direction.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
WARNING!
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE
DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK)
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held trans-
mitters that operate devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting or home secu-
rity systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by
your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the three
different HomeLink channels.
• To operate HomeLink, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink buttons. These buttons
will activate the devices they are programmed to
with each press of the corresponding HomeLink
button.
• The HomeLink indicator light is located above the
center button.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink
For efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal, it is recom-
mended that a new battery be placed in the hand-
held transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink system. Make sure
your hand-held transmitter is programmed to acti-
vate the device you are trying to program your
HomeLink button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of
your HomeLink before you use it for the first time.
HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
68
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Inter-
net at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink but-
tons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional but-
tons.
Identifying Whether You Have A
Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code
Device
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes.
A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the de-
vice. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not have
a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener
To program any of the HomeLink buttons to acti-
vate your garage door opener motor, follow the
steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage
door opener transmitter button you are trying to
replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink indicator light. The HomeLink indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
69
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code
final step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the ga-
rage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the garage door
opener motor. Firmly push and release the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button three times (holding the but-
ton for two seconds each time). If the garage
door opener motor operates, programming is
complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink button to con-
firm that the garage door opener motor oper-
ates. If the garage door opener motor does not
operate, repeat the final steps for the rolling
code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink but-
ton and observe the HomeLink indicator light. If
the HomeLink indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor op-
erates. If the garage door opener motor does not
operate, repeat the steps from the beginning.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the univer-
sal transceiver. Do not program the trans-
ceiver if people or pets are in the path of the
door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle con-
tains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odor-
less and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device
Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener” for the procedure on how to pro-
gram HomeLink to a miscellaneous device, as it
follows the same procedure. Be sure to determine if
the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code
before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during program-
ming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate
operators are designed to time-out in the same
manner. The procedure may need to be preformed
multiple times to successfully pair the device to your
HomeLink buttons.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
70
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button
To reprogram a single HomeLink button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink button to has a Rolling
Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button
until the HomeLink Indicator light begins to flash
after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF ) devices equipped in this ve-
hicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic Devel-
opment Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets, that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low powered
electrical accessories. The power outlets can be
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
labeled with a “key” are powered when the ignition is
in the ON or ACC position, while the outlets la-
beled with a “battery” are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
• All accessories connected to the “battery” pow-
ered outlets should be removed or turned off when
the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery
against discharge.
71
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located at the bottom of
the instrument panel.
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a
power outlet located in the rear cargo area.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt out-
let.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the vehicle from
starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., cool-
ers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade
the battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in), the
vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of
time to allow the generator to recharge the
vehicle's battery or plug the vehicle in with
EVSE charger.
• The vehicle uses a power inverter connected
to the HV battery to charge the 12V battery as
well as supports the 12V electrical loads, when
the vehicle is not ON.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet
Rear Power Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
72
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet
located on the right side of the vehicle, before the
third row of seats to convert DC current to AC
current. The Power Inverter can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power devices
requiring up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video
game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The Power Inverter turns on when the device is
plugged in, and the ignition is in RUN mode. It turns
off when the device is unplugged or the ignition is
no longer in RUN mode.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in over-
load protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is
exceeded, the Power Inverter shuts down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the Power
Inverter, it resets. To avoid overloading the circuit,
check the power ratings on electrical devices prior
to using the Power Inverter.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Inverter
73
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles or kilometers
in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver
interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings when
they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the specific
information you want and make selections and ad-
justments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls
The Instrument Cluster Display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
• Hybrid Info
• Trip (Trip A/Trip B)
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
steering wheel:
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the Main Menu items.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the Main Menu items.
Instrument Cluster Display Control
Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
74
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• Back/Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of a Main Menu
item. Push and hold the OK arrow button for one
second to reset displayed/selected features that
can be reset.
Oil Life Reset
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message
will display for approximately five seconds after a
single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change inter val. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctu-
ate, dependent upon your personal driving style.
• Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position.
• To reset the oil change indicator, refer to the fol-
lowing procedure:
Without pressing the brake pedal, push the EN-
GINE START/STOP button and place the ignition
in the ON/RUN position (do not start the vehicle.)
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after
scheduled maintenance is completed. Resetting oil
life other than when associated with a scheduled
maintenance may result in severe engine damage.
1. Push the OK button to enter the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
2. Push and release the down arrow button to ac-
cess the ”Oil Life” menu screen.
3. Push the left arrow button or right arrow button
to access the “Vehicle Info” submenu.
4. Hold the OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to
100%.
5. Push the up arrow button to exit the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position (do not start the
engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the igni-
tion in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
KeySense Cluster Messages —
If Equipped
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
• Continuous, dedicated telltale
• Unique Display Splash Screen
75
With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated messages shown in the following table:
Setting Instrument Cluster Display Message
None – With vehicle ignition ON “KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”
Max Vehicle Speed
• “Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime
• “Approaching max speed xx MPH/km” supported by a chime
Start Up Fuel Alert message “Range to empty xxx miles or km”
Early Low Fuel Alert Message “Fuel Low”
ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Forward Collision Warning “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Instrument Cluster Display Menu
Items
NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items
may vary depending on your vehicle features.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
Instrument Cluster Display
Programmable Features Screen Setup
Push the up or down arrow button to scroll through
the Menu Items until the Screen Setup displays in
the instrument cluster display. Push the OK button
to enter Screen Setup. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is displayed
in the instrument cluster display as well as the loca-
tion that information is displayed.
Configurable Screen Setup Menu Titles
• Compass • Trip A Distance
• Outside Temp • Trip B Distance
• Time • Audio Info
• Range to Empty • Menu Title
• Average MPG • Speedometer (Digital
Speed) select be-
tween MPH/km
• Current MPG • Defaults (Restore/
Cancel)
• Odometer
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
76
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as
such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or
alternative to the information contained in the
Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information
in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based
upon equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault
with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on
until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or pas-
senger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is
first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that
the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid
level is low, or that there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a
possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that
a problem with the Brake Booster has been de-
tected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when apply-
ing the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in
the master cylinder has dropped below a specified
level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cor-
nering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have ser vice performed,
and the brake fluid level checked.
77
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds.
The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the
light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by
an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake applica-
tion.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light illuminates when the 12 volt bat-
tery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the
vehicle is running, there may be a malfunction with
the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warn-
ing Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime
will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper
limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes
or until the engine is able to cool: whichever comes
first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a prob-
lem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is
running, the light will either stay on or flash depend-
ing on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition
when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK position.
The light should turn off. If the light remains on with
the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for ser-
vice as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
78
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/
rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing. The light will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check.
If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warn-
ing Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a fault
with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating”
in the Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the en-
gine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driv-
ing, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime
will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is cor-
rected. This light does not indicate how much oil is
in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked
under the hood.
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high
transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light
turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or
NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illu-
minated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust com-
ponents and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tem-
perature Warning Light illuminated will eventu-
ally cause severe transmission damage or trans-
mission failure.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
79
— Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is
left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Door Open Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed. This indicator will
reflect which doors are open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the liftgate is
open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
— Hybrid Electric Vehicle System Ser-
vice Light
This warning light will illuminate when service to the
hybrid electric system is needed. It will be accom-
panied by a "Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle Sys-
tem" message in the cluster. If the telltale stays on or
continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
— Plug Status Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when a plug status
fault is detected (when vehicle not in motion). It will
be accompanied by a cluster message indicating
the type of fault. You may receive one of the follow-
ing messages if a fault is detected:
• “Service Charging System” – If you see this mes-
sage, it is recommended to unplug and plug in
again, or try a different charging station. If an issue
continues, contact your authorized dealer to ser-
vice your high voltage charging system.
• “Issue Detected Check External Charging Sta-
tion” – If you see this message, the charging sta-
tion maybe powered off, having internal fault or
being scheduled to charge later. It is recom-
mended to try a different charging station. If an
issue continues, then contact your authorized
dealer.
NOTE:
Older or non-compliant J1772 EVSE models may
not support charging of this vehicle. If this vehicle
does not charge, it may be connected to a non-
compliant Level 2 EVSE, and will flash indicators.
Please identify this failure to the site operator
and/or EVSE provider.
NOTE:
Before driving the vehicle make sure the charging
cord has been removed from the charging inlet.
— Torque Limited Warning Light
This warning light illuminates when vehicle accel-
eration is limited due to a reduction in engine or
electric motor performance. Contact your autho-
rized dealer for service if illumination persists.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
80
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS ) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and service is required as soon as
possible. However, the conventional brake system
will continue to operate normally, assuming the
Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion, have the brake system inspected by an autho-
rized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the Electronic
Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC Indi-
cator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is acti-
vated. It should go out with the engine running. If
the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously
with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indi-
cator Light” come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if
it was turned off previously.
— Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
— LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid yellow
when the vehicle is approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the vehicle is crossing
the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the Lane-
Sense system is not operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel tank has approximately 1/8 of the fuel
remaining, this warning light will illuminate, and a
single chime will sound. The light will remain on until
fuel is added.
81
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Fault Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in
the ACC system. Contact a local authorized dealer
for service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
— Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in
the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indica-
tor Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light will
illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/
RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situa-
tions, the vehicle will drive normally.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to immedi-
ate loss of power or severe catalytic converter dam-
age. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flam-
WARNING!
mable substances such as dry plants, wood, card-
board, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is re-
quired.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower
than the recommended value and/or that slow pres-
sure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire
duration and fuel consumption may not be guaran-
teed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
82
Should one or more tires be in the condition men-
tioned above, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead
to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s re-
sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction in-
dicator is combined with the low tire pressure tell-
tale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This se-
quence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-
ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va-
riety of reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al-
ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve-
hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable sys-
tem operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not of
the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using after-
market tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire seal-
ant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
83
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indica-
tor Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that For-
ward Collision Warning is off.
Green Indicator Lights
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the
turn signal indicator will flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash.
Turn signals can be activated when the multifunc-
tion lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if ei-
ther indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
— KeySense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The KeySense indicator is illuminated when a Key-
Sense key is detected upon startup of the vehicle.
The indicator will remain lit for the entire key cycle
as a reminder that the KeySense key is in use. While
the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond
to settings associated with the KeySense profile.
Refer to “Keys" in “Getting to Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
— LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready to provide
visual and torque warnings if an unintentional lane
departure occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With No Target Detected Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Adap-
tive Cruise Control speed is SET and there is no
target vehicle detected.
Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further
information.
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set
With Target Vehicle Detected Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the Adap-
tive Cruise Control speed is SET and the target
vehicle is detected.
Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further
information.
— Ready To Drive Indicator
Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that
the vehicle has enough power to be driven, regard-
less of the speed of the vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
84
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise
control is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— Plug Status Indicator Light
When plugged in, the green plug indicator light will
illuminate if the EVSE charging plug is securely
attached to the charging port. This indicates that
the plug is detected, but doesn't mean it is charging.
It will be accompanied with a cluster message indi-
cating the charge status:
• “Plugged In And Charging”
• “Plugged In And Waiting to Charge On A Set
Schedule”
• “Plugged in and Charging Complete”
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven until it is unplugged.
White Indicator Lights
— Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) has
been turned on but not set.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
— LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not armed,
the LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
white. This occurs when only left, right, or neither
lane line has been detected. If a single lane line is
detected, the system is ready to provide only visual
warnings if an unintentional lane departure occurs
on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
— Cruise Control ON Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the elec-
tronic speed control is ON, but a speed has not
been set.
— Set Speed Display
The Set Speed Display indicator light indicates the
set speed for the Speed Control and Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) settings.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that
the high beam headlights are on. With the low
beams activated, push the multifunction lever for-
ward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the
high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
85
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated On-
board Diagnostic system called OBD II. This sys-
tem monitors the performance of the emissions,
engine, and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. When these systems are operating properly,
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as emissions well within cur-
rent government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in mak-
ing repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be
drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced be-
fore any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is run-
ning, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service
is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diag-
nostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to
allow access to information related to the perfor-
mance of your emissions controls. Authorized ser-
vice technicians may need to access this informa-
tion to assist with the diagnosis and service of your
vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II con-
nection port in order to read the VIN, diag-
nose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-
behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, includ-
ing safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident in-
volving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in
“Multimedia”.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
86
SAFETY FEATURES
Regenerative Braking System (RBS )
— Hybrid
Your vehicle has a Regenerative Braking System
(RBS). The RBS replenishes the vehicle's high volt-
age battery during deceleration, and is particularly
useful in stop-and-go city traffic. The electric mo-
tors which propel the vehicle forward can operate as
generators when braking. The RBS recharges the
high voltage battery under certain braking condi-
tions by recapturing energy that would otherwise be
lost while braking. The electric power that is gener-
ated goes back into the high voltage battery for
later use, for example when acceleration is desired.
The RBS uses conventional hydraulic friction
brakes, regenerative braking, or a combination to
slow the vehicle. If the system detects slippery con-
ditions while braking, ONLY friction is used to slow
the vehicle. The RBS can result in extended life of
the hydraulic service brakes; however, all inspection,
scheduled maintenance, and service intervals for
the vehicle service brakes must be followed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two
radar-based sensors located inside the rear bumper
fascia to detect highway licensable vehicles (auto-
mobiles, trucks, motorcycles etc.) that enter the
blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of the
vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m).
The zone length starts at the outside rear view
mirror and extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) be-
yond the rear bumper of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides
of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches ap-
proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher, and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is
operational. The BSM system sensors operate when
the vehicle is in any forward gear or REVERSE and
enters stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM warning light, located in the outside mir-
rors, will illuminate if a vehicle moves into a blind
spot zone.
Rear Detection Zones
87
The BSM system can also be configured to sound
an audible (chime) alert and mute the radio to
notify you of objects that have entered the detec-
tion zones.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to
aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces
where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be
blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear
view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles,
the system will not be able to alert the driver. Addi-
tionally, if the host vehicle is obscured by a flat
object on one side the system can false alert on
vehicles approaching from the opposite direction.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
the driver is alerted using both the visual and au-
dible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
WARNING!
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when back-
ing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots be-
fore backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available
in the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. How-
ever, when the system is operating in Rear Cross
Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected ob-
ject is present. Whenever an audible alert is re-
quested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Warning Light
SAFETY
88
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a de-
tected object. If the turn signal is then activated, and
it corresponds to an alert present on that side of the
vehicle, an audible chime will also be sounded.
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time, both the
visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall re-
spond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state always
requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
• The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
• The BSM system can work in conjunction with the
Keysense function of the vehicle if equipped. Re-
fer to “KeySense Cluster Messages" in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF ) devices equipped in this ve-
hicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For ward Collision Warning (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
provides the driver with audible and visual warnings
within the instrument cluster display, to warn the
driver when it detects a potential frontal collision.
The warnings are intended to provide the driver
with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Con-
troller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a for-
ward collision. When the system determines that a
forward collision is probable, the driver will be pro-
vided with audible and visual warnings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The forward collision button is located in the
Uconnect display in the controls settings.
• To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once to turn the system off.
89
• To turn the FCW system back on, press the for-
ward collision button again to turn the system on.
NOTE:
• The default status of FCW is “on”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents the
system from warning you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you. If FCW is set to
“off”, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature has three settings and can be
changed within the Uconnect System Screen:
•Far
• Medium
• Near
Far
The far setting provides warnings for potential col-
lisions more distant in front of the vehicle, allowing
the driver to have the most reaction time to avoid a
collision.
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent
warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Medium
The default status of FCW is the “Medium” setting
and “Warning And Braking” is in the “on” setting.
This allows the system to warn the driver of a pos-
sible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking.
Near
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn you of a potential frontal
collision when you are much closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” setting, which allows for a more dynamic driv-
ing experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to
avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
Changing the “Warning And Braking” status to
“off” prevents the system from providing autono-
mous braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of a
potential frontal collision. “Warning And Braking”
can be turned “off” in the Uconnect controls set-
tings.
Refer to the Owner's Manual for further
information.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not in-
tended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
FCW detect every type of potential collision.
The driver has the responsibility to avoid a colli-
sion by controlling the vehicle via braking and
steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead
to serious injury or death.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
SAFETY
90
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the in-
strument cluster and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
with the low tire pressure values in a different color,
when this occurs you must increase the tire pressure
to the recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by ap-
proximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature de-
creases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure
should always be set based on cold inf lation tire
pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inf lation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded
into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing
and Maintenance” for information on how to prop-
erly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this in-
creased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will
not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low
tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light) illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to ap-
proximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn ON the “TPMS Warning Light.”
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
91
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the origi-
nal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pres-
sures and warning have been established for
the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Unde-
sirable system operation or sensor damage
may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. The TPM sensor is not designed for use
on aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to your authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
CAUTION!
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a
tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire main-
tenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate
tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted elec-
tronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sen-
sors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
SAFETY
92
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in
one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the instrument cluster display will
display a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a differ-
ent color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as pos-
sible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in
a different color in the instrument cluster display
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value. Once the system receives the up-
dated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update if the ignition is in the ON/RUN position,
the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster display and will return to their
original color, and the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system
fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will no longer display, and a pressure value
will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can
occur due to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next
to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the com-
pact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the low-
pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light will remain on
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
93
and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in
the instrument cluster will still display a different
color pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the instrument cluster will display a “SER-
VICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare, the TPMS will update automati-
cally. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire assem-
blies that do not have TPMS Sensors, such as when
installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure
values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPM sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The instru-
ment cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS-
TEM” message and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle the
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer
be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this ve-
hicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
SAFETY
94
(2) This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or
may be optional equipment on others. If you are not
sure, ask an authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to mini-
mize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a
rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to “Child Restraints” in
this section for further information) must be se-
cured in the appropriate child restraint or belt-
positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-
facing child restraint) must ride in the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as far back as possible
and use the proper child restraint (Refer to
“Child Restraints” in this section for further
information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front
air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment oc-
curs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into
the space between occupants and the door and
occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a child
in a rear-facing child restraint.
95
WARNING!
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a
poor driver and could cause a collision that includes
you. This can happen far away from home or on
your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts re-
duce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury
caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Every-
one in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or out-
board front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled
when the ignition switch is first in the START or
ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passen-
ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermit-
tent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on
vehicle speed until the driver and occupied out-
board front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle
is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will be-
gin until the seat belts are buckled again.
SAFETY
96
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be re-
strained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet har-
nesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuck-
led the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until the driver and outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with
you under normal conditions. However, in a collision
the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
erly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t de-
ploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the interior
of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can
be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure
you and others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people rid-
ing in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event of
a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
97
WARNING!
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be
sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly.In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing
head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under
the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t
WARNING!
as strong as shoulder bones.Wear the seat belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used to-
gether.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Dam-
aged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the seat belt sys-
tem. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
ad just the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the
front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat
(for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to
allow the seat belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Pulling Out The Seat Belt
1 — Seat Belt
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
SAFETY
98
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To re-
move slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the
shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt.
A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle. The seat belt will automatically re-
tract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the
latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat
belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme-
diately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears
the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer
twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push
or squeeze the anchorage button to release the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the position
that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower posi-
tion, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher posi-
tion. After you release the anchorage button, try to
move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
Adjustable Anchorage
99
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in
the upward position without pushing or squeezing
the release button. To verify the shoulder belt an-
chorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder
belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
• Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third
Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row
center seat belts feature a seat belt with a mini-latch
plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to de-
tach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can
then be stored out of the way in the headliner for
added convenience to open up utilization of the
storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is
not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position in the headliner
slightly behind the second or third row seat.
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left
head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Mini-Latch Stowage
SAFETY
100
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To re-
move slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the
shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt re-
duces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on
the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch
plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch
plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and
regular latch plate into its stowed position.
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to
provide proper restraint and will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow
the preceding procedure to detach the mini-
latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the web-
bing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
101
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the adjust-
able upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is
in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can pro-
vide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt
Extender should be used only if the existing seat
belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Ex-
tender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the origi-
nal seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat
Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance be-
tween the front edge of the Seat Belt Ex-
tender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
WARNING!
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn
child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdo-
men and across the strong bones of the hips. Place
the shoulder belt across the chest and away from
the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the
back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the perfor-
mance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for
all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pre-
tensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced
immediately.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
SAFETY
102
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor as-
sembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child re-
straint system. For additional information, refer to
“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the locking fea-
ture for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull
the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as
to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts.
Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of web-
bing necessary to comfortably wrap around the oc-
cupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still re-
tract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use
the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child re-
straint is installed in a seating position that has a seat
belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and
under should always be properly restrained in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a child
in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
7 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Re-
tractor
103
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indi-
cates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Lock-
ing Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Au-
tomatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked accord-
ing to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
WARNING!
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraints that
have a harness for restraining the child.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with
a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access
to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the
tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch
plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of
the belt and install the car seat normally. When the
car seat is removed from the vehicle, slide the latch
plate above the park stitch to enable occupants to
latch the seatbelt securely.
Third Row Stow Clip - If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on
the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used
to hold the seat belt out of the path of the power
folding third row seat. Only place the seat belt
webbing in this clip while folding and opening the
seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the clip
when using the belt to restrain an occupant.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
SAFETY
104
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be
positioned properly on the occupant and they
could be more seriously injured in an accident as
a result.
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section
may be standard equipment on some models, or
may be optional equipment on others. If you are not
sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and intercon-
necting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag
System Components. Your vehicle may be
equipped with the following Air Bag System Com-
ponents:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-
tronic parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in
the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momen-
Third Row Stow Clip
105
tarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to
alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illumi-
nate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if
a malfunction is detected that could affect the air
bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature
of the malfunction. While the air bag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine re-
lated gauges are not working, the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your in-
strument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system im-
mediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,
which could affect the Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until the
fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will sound
to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the instru-
ment panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
SAFETY
106
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a child
in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Fea-
tures
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive in-
formation from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately dur-
ing an impact that requires air bag deployment. A
low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A
higher energy output is used for more severe colli-
sions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects
whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is
buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may ad just the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that may
ad just the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is
designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight input, as determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
107
WARNING!
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you prop-
erly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at
all. Always wear your seat belts even though
you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle damage
— for example, some pole collisions, truck under-
rides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that
produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle decelera-
tion over time, vehicle speed and damage by them-
selves are not good indicators of whether or not an
air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full
size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than
it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver
and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety
system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appro-
priate to the occupant’s seated weight, as deter-
mined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) con-
sists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
• Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat. The
Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cush-
ion foam. Any weight on the seat will be sensed by
the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor
to determine the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCM communicates this infor-
mation to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
SAFETY
108
Bag deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
passenger, including a child; or
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-
facing child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or
her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of
time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child
restraint
Reduced-power
deployment
Child, including a child
in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat*
Reduced-power
deployment OR Full-
power deployment
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power
deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power
deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in
the front passenger seat and never install a child
restraint system, including a rear-facing child re-
straint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a child
in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
• Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS communi-
cates the classification status to the ORC. The
ORC uses the classification to determine whether
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Prop-
erly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
109
• Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that the
OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passen-
ger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be prop-
erly positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure
to do so may result in serious injury or death. The
OCS determines the most probable classification
of the occupant that it detects. The OCS will detect
the front passenger’s decreased or increased seated
weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a
collision. This does not mean that the OCS is work-
ing improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in a reduced-power deployment of the Pas-
senger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the
front passenger’s seated weight on the front pas-
senger seat may result in a full-power deployment
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating in-
clude:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to an-
other part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or
instrument panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on
the front passenger seat are attached to the front
passenger seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
SAFETY
110
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small teenager
or adult in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an out-
put signal to the OCS that is different from
the occupant’s properly seated weight input.
This may result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright, fac-
ing forward, in the center of the seat, with your
feet comfortably on or near the floor.
WARNING!
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may pro-
vide an output signal to the OCS that is dif-
ferent than the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, which may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from
working properly, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any
objects on the floor under the front passenger
seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A malfunc-
tion in the OCS may affect the operation of the air
bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
111
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag inf lation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components must
function as designed. Do not make any modifica-
tions to the front passenger seat components, as-
sembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or
cushion needs service for any reason, take the ve-
hicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly fol-
lowed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly
or components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the
vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS ) component or SRS related compo-
nent or fastener be modified or replaced with any
part except those which are approved by FCA US
LLC.
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its re-
lated components, seat cover or cushion may
inadvertently change the air bag deployment
in case of a frontal collision. This could result in
death or serious injury to the front passenger if
the vehicle is involved in a collision. A modi-
fied vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FM-
VSS) and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel
below the steering column and a Supplemental Pas-
senger Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the glove compartment. The Supple-
mental Knee Air Bags provide enhanced protection
during a frontal impact by working together with the
seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
SAFETY
112
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-
Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard
side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts
and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place ob-
jects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing seri-
ous injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air
Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag
113
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduc-
tion potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where
the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the de-
ployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your ve-
hicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an
aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not
add roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in cer-
tain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of col-
lision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protec-
tion. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde-
pendently; a left side impact deploys the left Side
Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side colli-
sions, including some collisions at certain angles, or
some side collisions that do not impact the area of
the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags
may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions
where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SAFETY
114
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, includ-
ing children, should never lean on or sleep
against the door, side windows, or area where
the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessar y for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright in
the center of the seat.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
rollover events. The ORC determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not
a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover
events. The rollover sensing system determines if a
rollover event may be in progress and whether de-
ployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the
rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
115
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immedi-
ately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong
with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags,
any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as
the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are
similar to friction rope burns or those you might
get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium f loor.
They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within
a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-
like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the non-
toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne
particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat.
If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with
cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to
fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor.
If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the
garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an autho-
rized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller System serviced as
well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to
an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains in-
tact, depending on the nature of the event, the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the following
functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If
Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long
as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response
System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the En-
hanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
SAFETY
116
• Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric Motor (if equipped)
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before reset-
ting the system and starting the engine. If there are
no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below.
If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After an event occurs requiring activation of the
Enhanced Accident Response System, when the
system is active, a “Service Hybrid Electric Vehicle
System” message will be displayed on the instru-
ment cluster. The vehicle is not drivable in this state.
In order to reset the High Voltage Battery and En-
gine, the vehicle must be towed to an authorized
dealer immediately to be inspected and have the
Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
In order to immediately reset the Hazard Flashers,
Interior Lights, Power Door Locks, HVAC Blower
Motor, the ignition switch must be changed from
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the com-
ponents or wiring, including adding any kind
of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
WARNING!
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add after-
market side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag
system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer for any air bag system service. If
your seat, including your trim cover and cush-
ion, needs to be serviced in any way (including
removal or loosening/tightening of seat at-
tachment bolts), take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons with
disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.
117
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s sys-
tems performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operat-
ing;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries
occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are re-
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufac-
turer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the informa-
tion if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every state
in the United States, and every Canadian province,
requires that small children ride in proper restraint
systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted
for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the
child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have
the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and
follow all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels at-
tached to the child restraint.
SAFETY
118
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Re-
straint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Har-
ness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown
the height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
119
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or
until they reach either the height or weight limit of
their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child
restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers
and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injur y
to a child 12 years or younger, including a child
in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this ve-
hicle is not designed to manage the crash forces
of this type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg
may not function as it was designed by the car
seat manufacturer, and your child may be more
severely injured as a result.
SAFETY
120
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride
forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child
seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-
facing direction are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or
height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat
with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat
belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent
over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is
against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster
seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
WARNING!
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
•
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjust-
ing the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle
seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child re-
straint.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave
it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or acci-
dent, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks
and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder
belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to
bend over the front of the seat when their back is
against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear
seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1.
Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2.
Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the
front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still
sitting all the way back?
3.
Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4.
Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5.
Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then
the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle.
If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat
belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is
latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the
face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt
on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder
belt will not protect a child properly, which may
result in serious injury or death. A child must always
wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat
belt correctly.
121
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the ve-
hicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a
top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In
these seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Re-
straints In This Vehicle
LATCH Label
7 Passenger LATCH Positions Second Row
Quad
— Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchor-
ages Per Seating Position)
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
122
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight
of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once
the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used to-
gether to attach a rear-facing or for ward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage
system to attach a rear-facing or for ward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster
seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Ye s
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat
if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed if they interfere
with the installation of the child restraint. The 3rd row center
head restraint is removable, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
123
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the
head restraint may be folded and the child seat
installed in front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used by an
occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in
a seat with the head restraint in its lowered posi-
tion could result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
LATCH Anchorages
(Second Row Anchorages Shown)
SAFETY
124
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages located
behind all second row seating positions. The third
row has a tether anchor on the 40% seat for the right
outboard position and in the center of the 60% seat
for either the center or left outboard seating posi-
tion. All tether anchorages are located on the back
of the seat, near the floor.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to
the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the con-
nection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child re-
straints and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will
have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
LATCH Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorages Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorage
(Second Row Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
125
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the
third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used
for the right outboard position behind the front
passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are used for the
center seating position (2). The left outboard posi-
tion (3) does not have lower anchorages. Do not
install a child restraint using anchorages B and C.
This is not a LATCH position in your vehicle.
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the out-
board position, do not use that outboard position. If
a child seat in the center position blocks the out-
board LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a
child seat in that outboard position.
WARNING!
• Use anchorages C and D to install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint using anchorages B
and C. This is not a LATCH-compatible po-
sition in your vehicle.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. Please refer to
"To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re-
straint" for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child re-
straint. Not all child restraint systems will be in-
stalled as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re-
straint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the
Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt
each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on
the tether strap of the child seat so that you can
more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the
vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchor-
ages for that seating position. For some second
row seats, you may need to recline the seat and /
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward
and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room
for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child
seat.
Center Seat LATCH Positions
SAFETY
126
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it
to the top tether anchorage. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether
Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the
belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a
child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt be-
hind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If
the buckled seat belt interferes with the child re-
straint installation, instead of buckling it behind the
child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that
the seat belts are not toys and that they should not
play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no cir-
cumstances are they to be used for adult seat
belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.
127
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of
a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly se-
cure a child restraint can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s di-
rections exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap por-
tion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint
so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The
ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and
then letting the webbing retract back into the re-
tractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking
noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” descrip-
tion in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for
additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sec-
tions for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
7 Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tor
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
SAFETY
128
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install
a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight
limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Ye s
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child re-
straint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints can be removed if they interfere
with the installation of the child restraint. The 3rd row center
head restraint is removable, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against
the belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
129
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint inter-
feres with the installation of the child restraint, the
head restraint may be folded and the child seat
installed in front of it.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used by an
occupant who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in
a seat with the head restraint in its lowered posi-
tion could result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of
a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly se-
cure a child restraint can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s di-
rections exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may
need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in
the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-
most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 – Folded Headrest
2 – Child Restraint
SAFETY
130
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat
belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the
webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while
you push the child restraint rearward and down-
ward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, con-
nect the tether strap to the anchorage and
tighten the tether strap. See the section “Install-
ing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether An-
chorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the
belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch
(25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with
a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier access
to occupants. If the park stitch interferes with the
tight installation of a child restraint, slide the latch
plate over the stitching to shorten the lap portion of
the belt and install the car seat following the steps
above. When the car seat is removed from the
vehicle, slide the latch plate above the park stitch to
enable occupants to latch the seatbelt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
131
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off features
of the child restraint, do not use the lock-off feature.
Instead, switch the seat belt to the locking mode, as
described in the steps above or move the car seat to
a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint
System” for the location of approved tether an-
chorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan
to install the child restraint to find the tether
anchorage. You may need to move the seat for-
ward to provide better access to the tether an-
chorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the
child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjust-
able rear head restraints, raise the head restraint,
Seat Belt Park Stitch
Top Tether Anchorage Locations 3rd Row
SAFETY
132
and where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two posts. If
not possible, lower the head restraint and pass
the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strapaccording to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to se-
cure a child restraint top tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into
the opening bet ween the seatbacks as you
remove slack in the strap.
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the 60%
seat in the third row may be used by either the left
outboard or the center seating position. Only tether
one child restraint to the tether anchorage at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether an-
chorage for either seating position on the 60% third
row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct
path for the strap between the anchor and the
child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center
head restraint and route the tether strap around
the inboard (left) side of the head restraint sup-
port posts, as shown in the diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint
to the top tether anchorage as shown in the
diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strapaccording to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment
(Second Row Anchorage Shown)
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
133
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than
one child restraint to the tether anchorage on
the 60% seat in the third row. This anchorage is
intended for one child restraint at a time.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your
pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and
possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic
braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breath-
ing (CO), follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
SAFETY
134
WARNING!
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained en-
gine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be de-
tected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or
rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and
ad jacent body areas for broken, damaged, deterio-
rated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, in-
spect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as re-
quired.
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must
be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e.,
bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any
question regarding seat belt or retractor condition,
replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb
check, this light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag System has been
detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on
while driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the wind-
shield. See an authorized dealer for service if your
defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using
the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of posi-
tion and interfere with the accelerator, brake or
clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your ve-
hicle in other ways.
135
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasten-
ers may cause your floor mat to interfere with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a
loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat
using the f loor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is se-
cured using the floor mat fasteners on a regu-
lar basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat. NEVER
install or stack an additional floor mat on top
of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your ve-
hicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only
use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle con-
trol.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the f loor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-
install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
SAFETY
136
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other
objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the
tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for tight-
ness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper
cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the controls.
Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on
the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight park-
ing for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if
gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid
leaks are suspected. The cause should be located
and corrected immediately.
137
STARTING THE VEHICLE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust
both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of reasons.
A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
Request Propulsion System Active (PSA) or “Ve-
hicle is Ready to Drive” mode with the gear selector
in the PARK position. Apply the brake before shift-
ing to any driving range.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can
be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose
side of the key fob (side opposite of the Emergency
Key) against the ENGINE START/STOP button
and push to operate the ignition switch.
Normal Starting
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
Achieving vehicle READY using the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The READY indicator will appear in the cluster
when the vehicle is in ready to drive mode, which
may include the start of the engine depending
on conditions such as battery state of charge and
engine temperature.
4. If you wish to terminate Vehicle is Ready to Drive
mode, push the button again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions —
With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In
PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates simi-
lar to an ignition switch by providing three positions:
OFF, ACC and RUN. To change the ignition mode
without starting the vehicle (to power certain acces-
sories), follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once,
without brake pedal being pressed, to place the
ignition in the ACC mode (instrument cluster
will display “ACC”).
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a sec-
ond time, without brake pedal being pressed, to
place the ignition in the RUN mode (instrument
cluster will display “Ignition or Accessor y On”).
STARTING AND OPERATING
138
NOTE:
• The vehicle is not able to be driven in the
“Ignition or Accessory On” mode, see
“Achieving Vehicle Is Ready To Drive Mode
Using the ENGINE START / STOP Button”
previously defined in this section for further
information.
• The rotary gear selector will turn but only
PARK and NEUTRAL are accessible in the
“Ignition or Accessory On” mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time, without brake pedal being pressed, to re-
turn the ignition to the OFF mode (instrument
cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could be
reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same time.
If pressure is detected on both pedals simultane-
ously, a warning message will display in the instru-
ment cluster. For further information, refer to “In-
strument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in plac-
ing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the
following pages occur. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary method by
which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display and
near the gear selector. If the "P" indicator is
blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your ve-
hicle is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the Instru-
ment Cluster Display and on the shifter. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver at-
tempts to turn off the engine, if certain condi-
tions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark, auto-
matically shifting the vehicle’s transmission to
the PARK position. The rotary shifter will auto-
matically reset itself to the PARK position. The
vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF po-
sition (Engine OFF). When AutoPark is acti-
vated the instrument cluster will display the mes-
sage “AutoPark Engaged”
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP
BUTTON
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s transmission
139
to the PARK position. The Electric Park Brake
SAFE HOLD feature will also activate in some
conditions. Please reference SAFE HOLD pages
for additional information regarding this
function.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary selector
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged”will display
in the instrument cluster.
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
• AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or Brake Pedal is not
depressed
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged”will display
in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the park-
ing brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
WARNING!
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blink-
ing. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEU-
TRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the en-
gine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could in-
jure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
STARTING AND OPERATING
140
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is danger-
ous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
CAUTION!
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal with the
exception of shifting between Drive and Low.
Shifting between Drive and Low can occur
without any brake application.
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the park brake switch
momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may Park.
Park will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will display in the Instrument Cluster
Display if vehicle speed is above 1.2 MPH
(1.9 km/h). The gear position indicator will blink
continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h)
when the driver shifts into PARK, the transmis-
sion will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 MPH (1.9 km/h) and the
above condition are met, enabling AutoPark. A
vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll.
As an added precaution, always apply the park-
ing brake when exiting the vehicle.
After Starting
To optimize energy efficiency, the vehicle will auto-
matically control engine operation.
To Turn Off The Vehicle Using
ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF
position.
141
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with vehicle
speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h), when the EN-
GINE START/STOP button is pushed, the in-
strument cluster display will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message, and the vehicle will remain
running.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK, with vehicle
speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), when the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed con-
tinuously for at least two seconds (or three short
pushes in a row) the vehicle ignition mode will
exit Drive "Ready" mode and enter "Accessory
mode". Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
• This vehicle is equipped with an automatic shut-
down feature. If the vehicle is left in a “READY”
state (vehicle running) with the shifter in “PARK”
for one hour, the vehicle will automatically turn
itself off.
• The vehicle provides automatic notification, using
a three Horn Chirp Alert, cluster chiming, and a
cluster message ("Key Fob has Left the Vehicle")
if the vehicle was not turned OFF (still "Ready to
Drive") and a valid FOB for the vehicle is not
detected within the passenger cabin, following the
opening and closing of any passenger compart-
ment door (requires all doors to be closed before
the FOB check will occur). These automatic alerts
are to remind the driver to turn OFF the vehicle
before leaving it, as well as, to let the driver know
that the vehicle's FOB may have been uninten-
tionally removed from the vehicle by an exiting
passenger. After providing the horn chirp alert,
additional auto chirps will be inhibited until the
shifter has been moved out of Park or ignition
cycled.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your ve-
hicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and qual-
ity grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min-
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem.
STARTING AND OPERATING
142
PARK BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and
some additional features that make the parking
brake more convenient and useful. The Electric
Park Brake Switch is located in the integrated center
stack.
To engage the park brake manually, push the Elec-
tric Park Brake Switch.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake switch
down momentarily.
The parking brake will disengage automatically
when the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
the transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, the
driver seat belt is buckled, and an attempt is made
to drive away by pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
• You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back
of the vehicle while the parking brake engages or
disengages.
• Once the parking brake is fully engaged, the
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will illuminate.
Once the park brake is fully disengaged, the
BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster
and the LED indicator on the switch will extin-
guish.
• If your foot is on the brake pedal while you are
engaging or disengaging the parking brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal move-
ment.
• The park brake can be engaged even when the
ignition switch is OFF. However, it can only be
disengaged when the ignition switch is in the ON/
RUN position.
• The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either
the released or applied position. The light will
extinguish upon releasing the switch.
• Refer to “Parking Brake” in “Starting And Operat-
ing” located in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the park-
ing brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock your ve-
hicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is danger-
Electric Park Brake Switch
143
WARNING!
ous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking brake en-
gaged, or repeated use of the parking brake to
slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to
the brake system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake System that will engage the park brake auto-
matically if the vehicle is left unsecured. If the auto-
matic transmission is not in PARK, the seat belt is
unbuckled, the driver door is open, the vehicle is at
a standstill, and there is no attempt to depress the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the park brake will
automatically engage to prevent the vehicle from
rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the Electric Park Brake Switch while the driver door
is open and brake pedal is pressed. Once manually
bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the
vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is
cycled to the OFF position and back to ON again.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the park brake. Always apply the park
brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting
the vehicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blink-
ing. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
144
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEU-
TRAL if your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal. The vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could in-
jure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running or the propulsion system
is active. Before exiting a vehicle, always come
to a complete stop, then apply the park brake,
shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the
ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted move-
ment.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is danger-
ous for a number of reasons. A child or others
WARNING!
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the park brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal with the
exception of shifting between Drive and Low.
Shifting between Drive and Low can occur
without any brake application.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Hybrid Transmission
The transmission is controlled using a rotary elec-
tronic gear selector located on the center console.
The transmission gear range (PRNDL) is displayed
both above the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster display.
To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selec-
tor.
Transmission Gear Selector
145
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmis-
sion out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when stopped or
moving at low speeds).
Push down on the gear selector and then rotate to
access the L position.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over ac-
celerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control System has been designed to shut down if
multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed
Control on/off button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the sys-
tem cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slip-
pery.
To Activate
Push the On/Off button to activate the Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the On/Off button a second time. The cruise
indicator light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Speed Control Switches
1 — Push SET (+)/Accel
2 — Push RES/Resume
3 — Push SET (-)/Decel
4 — Push On/Off
5 — Push CANC/Cancel
STARTING AND OPERATING
146
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident.
Always leave the system off when you are not
using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or
SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to
OFF, erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC ) —
IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Switches
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
2 — Distance Setting – Decrease
3 — Distance Setting – Increase
147
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driv-
ing convenience provided by cruise control while
traveling on highways and major roadways. How-
ever, it is not a safety system and not designed to
prevent collisions. Speed Control function per-
forms differently. Please refer to the proper sec-
tion within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC
utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of
you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while match-
ing the speed of the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
WARNING!
driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed, dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead; and, most impor-
tantly, brake operation to ensure safe opera-
tion of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious per-
sonal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a dis-
abled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be lim-
ited upon adverse sight distance condi-
tions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
WARNING!
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for approximately 3 minutes
in the stop position. If the target vehicle
does not start moving within 3 minutes
the parking brake will be activated, and
the ACC system will be cancelled.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situ-
ations (i.e., in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep up-
hill or downhill slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving
at a constant speed.
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the in-
strument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
STARTING AND OPERATING
148
To turn the system off, push and release the Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At
this time, the system will turn off and the instrument
cluster display will show “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show the
set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted
to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is set when the
vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set
speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, after
the ACC has been set. If you do not, the vehicle
may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If
this occurs:
• The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
• The system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The
vehicle speed will only be determined by the posi-
tion of the accelerator pedal.
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster dis-
play will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than two
seconds, then the driver will either have to push
the RES (resume) button, or apply the accelerator
pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing set
speed.
• ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing
traffic and road conditions could cause the ve-
hicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for
safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through
the instrument cluster. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” in the Owner’s Manual. The speed incre-
ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
149
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until
the button is released. The increase in set speed is
reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments
until the button is released. The increase in set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased
by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected through
the instrument cluster. Refer to ”Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” in the Owner’s Manual. The speed incre-
ment shown is dependant on the speed of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements
until the button is released. The decrease in set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed
will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements
until the button is released. The decrease in set
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
• When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
• When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the powertrain braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.
• The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full
stop when following a target vehicle. If an ACC
host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a standstill,
after two seconds the driver will either have to
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the accel-
erator pedal to reengage the ACC to the existing
set speed.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driv-
ing up hill and down hill. However, a slight speed
change on moderate hills is normal. When driving
up hill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if
the braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
Setting The Following Distance In
ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars (me-
dium) and one bar (short). Using this distance set-
ting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets
the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
STARTING AND OPERATING
150
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting — Increase button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting increases
by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases
by one bar (shorter).
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF ) devices equipped in this ve-
hicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance be-
tween the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when
backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. If your
vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle brakes may be automatically applied and
released when performing a reverse parking ma-
neuver if the system detects a possible collision with
an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking
function by pressing the gas pedal, turning
ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or changing
the gear while the automatic brakes are being
applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
Park Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle
speed, road conditions, and brake capability.
• The automatic braking function may not be ap-
plied fast enough for moving obstacles that ap-
proach the rear of the vehicle from the left and / or
right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through
ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding possible collisions with de-
tected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
151
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” for
limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled
or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear
selector position, the system will remain active until
the vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and
above the system's operating speed, a warning will
appear within the instrument cluster display indicat-
ing the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is de-
creased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors
can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, t ype and orientation of the
obstacle.
ParkSense Visual Alert
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be dis-
played if Sound and Display is selected from the
Customer - Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display. It provides visual warn-
ings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for
further information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch, located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
STARTING AND OPERATING
152
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
System will reject customer input to turn the system
off via the hard switch. The instrument cluster dis-
play will show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature
Cannot be Disabled" message.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument clus-
ter will display “PARKSENSE OFF”. Furthermore,
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until
you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
• When you move the gear selector to the RE-
VERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the
instrument cluster display will show “PARKSENSE
OFF ” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The ParkSense system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper,
or it could provide a false indication that an ob-
stacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate is
in the open position.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system OFF if objects, such as bicycle carriers, are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be dis-
played in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
WARNING!
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your sur-
roundings. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly is disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure
to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will
be much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect
the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, de-
pending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the ve-
hicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles lo-
153
CAUTION!
cated above or below the sensors will not be
detected when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE FRONT AND
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the
rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. If your vehicle is equipped with
an automatic transmission, the vehicle brakes may
be automatically applied and released when per-
forming a reverse parking maneuver if the system
detects a possible collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
• The driver can override the automatic braking
function by pressing the gas pedal, turning
ParkSense off via ParkSense switch, or changing
the gear while the automatic brakes are being
applied.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if ESC is not
available.
• Automatic brakes will not be available if there is a
faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
Park Assist system or the Braking System Module.
• The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle
speed, road conditions, and brake capability.
• The automatic braking function may not be ap-
plied fast enough for moving obstacles that ap-
proach the rear of the vehicle from the left and / or
right sides.
• The automatic braking function can be enabled/
disabled from the Customer-Programmable Fea-
tures section of the Uconnect System.
• ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
state for the automatic braking function through
ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to assist
the driver in avoiding possible collisions with de-
tected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
gear.
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
• The driver must stay in full control of the vehicle's
acceleration and braking and is responsible for the
vehicle's movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in
“Starting And Operating” in your Owner’s Manual
for limitations of this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled
or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector
is in REVERSE or DRIVE.If ParkSense is enabled at
one of these gear selector positions, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in
REVERSE and above the system's operating
STARTING AND OPERATING
154
speed, a warning will appear in the instrument clus-
ter display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast.
The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi-
mately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle
that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors
can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on
the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the ve-
hicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 in (120 cm) from the front
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch, located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
System will reject customer input to turn the system
off via the hard switch. The instrument cluster dis-
play will show "KeySense in Use Selected Feature
Cannot be Disabled" message.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is in-
tended to assist the driver during parallel and per-
pendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a
proper parking space, providing audible/visual in-
structions, and controlling the steering wheel. The
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined as
“semi-automatic” since the driver maintains control
of the accelerator, gear selector and brakes. De-
pending on the driver's parking maneuver selection,
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is capable
of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a perpen-
dicular parking space on either side (i.e., driver side
or passenger side).
155
NOTE:
• The driver is always responsible for controlling the
vehicle, responsible for any surrounding objects,
and must intervene as required.
• The system is provided to assist the driver and not
to substitute the driver.
• During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver
touches the steering wheel after being instructed
to remove their hands from the steering wheel, the
system will cancel, and the driver will be required
to manually complete the parking maneuver.
• The system may not work in all conditions (e.g.
environmental conditions such as heavy rain,
snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space that
has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic sensor
waves).
• New vehicles from the dealership must have at
least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-
brated and performs accurately. This is due to the
system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to improve
the performance of the feature. The system will
also continuously perform the dynamic vehicle
calibration to account for differences such as over
or under inflated tires and new tires.
Enabling And Disabling The
ParkSense Active Park Assist System
The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch once
(LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist system,
push the ParkSense Active Park Assist switch again
(LED turns off).
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist System is
enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching — Push
OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster display. You may
switch to perpendicular parking if you desire. Push
the OK button on the left side of the steering wheel
to change your parking space setting. You may
switch back to parallel parking if you desire.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual for further informa-
tion.
LANESENSE —
IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the
steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within
the lane boundaries. The LaneSense system will
also provide a visual warning through the instru-
ment cluster display to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warn-
ing by applying torque into the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across that lane marking
(no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system pro-
vides a visual warning through the instrument clus-
STARTING AND OPERATING
156
ter display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane. When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands
are on the steering wheel and provides an audible
and visual warning to the driver when the driver’s
hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The
system will cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the Lane-
Sense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On”
message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the Lane-
Sense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane
drift condition through the instrument cluster dis-
play.
Instrument Cluster Display
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not
been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is
solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the Lane-
Sense Telltale
is solid white only when the left
lane marking has been detected and the system is
ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display if an unintentional lane departure
occurs on the left side.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the visual warning in the instrument cluster
display will show the left inside lane line flashing
yellow (on/off), while the outside lane line on the
left of the display will remain solid yellow. The
LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white
to flashing yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines De-
tected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines
turn from gray to white. The LaneSense telltale
is solid green when both lane markings have
been detected and the system is “armed” to pro-
vide visual warnings in the instrument cluster dis-
play and a torque warning in the steering wheel if
an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left inside and outside lane lines turn
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
157
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has
been approached and is in a lane departure situa-
tion, the left inside lane line flashes yellow (on/off)
while the left outside line remains solid yellow. The
LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow
to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the
lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane
the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can
configure through the Uconnect system screen. Re-
fer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages. (anti-
lock brakes, traction control system, electronic sta-
bility control, forward collision warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK
UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears
again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned on), the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF posi-
tion.
A touch screen button to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the vehicle is
not in REVERSE gear. Display of the camera image
after shifting out of REVERSE can be disabled via a
touch screen button personalization entry in the
camera settings menu.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the
rear of the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
158
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up
on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay at-
tention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
CAUTION!
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
SURROUND VIEW
CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround
View Camera System that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the surroundings and top view
of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE or a different view is selected
through the "on screen soft buttons". The top view
of the vehicle will show which doors are open. The
image will be displayed on the touchscreen display
along with a caution note “Check Entire Surround-
ings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds, this note will disappear. The Surround View
Camera System is comprised of four sequential
cameras located in the front grille, rear liftgate and
side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera System has program-
mable settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear
camera view and top view is the default view of the
system.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned on), the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF posi-
tion. There is a touch screen button (X ) to disable
the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned off), the surround view camera
mode is exited and the last known screen appears
again.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle,
including the side view mirrors and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
159
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the
rear of the vehicle.
Modes Of Operation
“Manual” activation of the Surround View camera is
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera
soft key located in the “Controls” screen within the
Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top view will show in the Uconnect System with
Rear View and Front View in a split view display.
There is integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at
the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
NOTE:
• Front tires will be in image when the tires are
turned.
• Due to wide angle cameras in mirror, the image will
appear distorted.
• Top view will show which sliding doors are open.
• Open front doors will remove outside image.
Rear View
This is the Default view of the system in REVERSE
and is paired with a Top view of the vehicle with
active guide lines for the projected path when en-
abled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will give the
driver a wider angle view of the rear camera system.
The Top view will be disabled when this is selected.
Front View
The Front view will show you what is immediately in
front of the vehicle with guide lines for the pro-
jected path when enabled.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key will give the
driver a wider angle view of the front camera sys-
tem. The Top view will be disabled when this is
selected.
Deactivation
The system can be deactivated in the following
conditions:
• The speed of the vehicle reaches greater than
8 mph (13 km/h).
• The vehicle shifted into PARK from a different
gear.
• If the vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE,
press the “X” button.
• The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect settings menu. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
NOTE:
• If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse
with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover
the lenses.
• If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see
your nearest authorized dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING
160
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for the safety of your sur-
roundings and must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It
is recommended that the driver look fre-
quently over his/her shoulder when using Sur-
round View.
REFUELING THE
VEHICLE
1. Put the vehicle in the PARK postion.
2. Press the fuel filler door release button (located
in the driver's door in the upper map pocket).
3. The button press will initiate a sequence of
events to depressurize the fuel system. A mes-
sage will display in the cluster letting you know
when the vehicle is ready to be fueled.
NOTE:
• After pushing the release button you will have
20 minutes to fuel the vehicle, beyond 20 min-
utes you will need to press the release button
again.
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
Instrument Cluster Message
161
• The fuel door could take up to 15 seconds to
open. It may take longer to open in some
situations, such as high ambient tempera-
tures.
• If you hear a hissing sound when the nozzle is
inserted into the filler pipe, wait to begin fuel-
ing the vehicle until after the hissing sound
stops.
4. The fuel door pops away from the vehicle when
it has been released. To finish opening the fuel
door, manually rotate it away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup
and re-release the fuel door using the inside
release button. Do not pry on the door.
5. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
6. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe, the
nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors while
refueling.
7. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
8. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
9. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper door. A
funnel is provided to open the flapper door to allow
emergency refueling with a gas can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the storage bin located in
the left rear quarter trim.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as the
fuel nozzle, ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
both flapper doors open.
3. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior to
putting back in the spare tire storage area.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel door is open or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel con-
tainers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Door
STARTING AND OPERATING
162
Emergency Fuel Door Release
1. Cycle the vehicle's ignition to the RUN position
(PSA not active)
NOTE:
If this is not performed, then the tank vent
valve will not open. This will result in prema-
ture fuel pump shutoffs.
2. Access the storage bin located behind the rear
cargo trim panel.
3. Remove access cover in the upper right corner.
4. After removing green handle from retention
bracket, then pull the green handle directly away
from the bracket to release the fuel door.
5. Re-install handle back into bracket when
completed.
6. Wait 15 seconds and then begin fueling your
vehicle.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline con-
tains a higher level of de-
tergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When
available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com
for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retail-
ers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials in-
tended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing is not permitted with this vehicle.
Access Cover Location
Fuel Door Emergency Release
163
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground All Models
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
• To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engage-
ment, you must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if
rear wheels are on the ground). The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-
tomer programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
• When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and
provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
• If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commer-
cial towing service, please refer to “Towing A Dis-
abled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency”.
Recreational Towing — All Models
DO NOT f lat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is
CAUTION!
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accom-
plished using a tow dolly (front wheels off the
ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the
ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the park brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING
164
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do
not start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the park brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
165
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
lower center area of the instrument panel.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning f lasher. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals will
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn
off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to oper-
ate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center & Rear Reading Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Door Courtesy Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Instrument Cluster Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Lamp(s) LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
166
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Halogen Headlamp
Projector Halogen Low Beam - 9005HL+
High Beams - 9005LL
Dedicated Daytime Running Lamp (If Equipped) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24WNA
Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamp H11LL
LED Front Fog Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop (CHMSL) Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp
Rear Tail - Body Side - LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail - Liftgate - LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Side Marker: W3W
Backup Lamp W21W
License Lamp LED (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
167
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
WARNING!
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission system)
or steering system blows, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses, micro-fuses,
circuit breakers and relays. A label that identifies
each component is printed on the inside of the
cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make
sure engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks lo-
cated at each side of the PDC cover, avoid the
usage of screw drivers or any other tool to remove
the cover, since they may apply excessive force and
result on a broken/damaged part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its two
locks.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F06 – 15 Amp Blue Low Temp Active Pump
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F08 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier / Active Noise Control
F09 – – Not Used
F10 – 15 Amp Blue High Temp Aux Pump & HV Electric Coolant Htr Enable
F11 – 15 Amp Blue ELCM / FTIV
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
168
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F13 – – Not Used
F14A –
10 Amp Red
Media Hub 1, 2, 3
F14B – Pwr Lumbar Switch
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC / Power Locks
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 – – Not Used
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lights #1)
F19 – – Not Used
F20 – 10 Amp Red Low Temp Passive Pump
F21 20 Amp Blue – PIM - Park PAWL Motor
F22 – – Not Used
F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
F25A –
10 Amp Red
Handsfree (Lt & Rt Rear Door Release Module)
F25B – Active Grill Shutter
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module - RT
F28A –
10 Amp Red
Diagnostic Port
F28B – USB + AUX (UCI) Port (IP) / Video USB Port
F29 – – Not Used
F30A –
10 Amp Red
ECM / PIM
F30B – Not Used
F31 – 10 Amp Red 3, 4 way Valves
169
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F34 25 Amp Clear – Rear Door Control Module - Lt
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Control Module
F36 – – Not Used
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting / PCM #2)
F38 – – Not Used
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 20 Amp Blue – Trans Oil Pump
F41 – – Not Used
F42 – – Not Used
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior Lights)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 40 Amp Green – EBCM Motor
F49 25 Amp Clear – Rear Sliding Door Module - Lt
F50 25 Amp Clear – Rear Door Control Module - Rt
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 – – Not Used
F53 – – Not Used
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
170
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F55A –
15 Amp Blue
RF Hub/KIN/ESL - BUX Only
F55B – DVD / VRM
F56A –
10 Amp Red
FRT. & RR HVAC CTRL/ OCM / ESL
F56B – B. EPS / ESC - Electric Stability Ctr
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow PIM - Main Power Supply
F58 – – Not Used
F59 – – Not Used
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – – Not Used
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow PIM-Main PWR Supply
F63 – 5 Amp Tan HV Elect Coolant HTR Enable
F64 – – Not Used
F65 – – Not Used
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) / SGW
F67 – 10 Amp Red HALF / PTS / Drivers Assist System Module (DASM)
F68 – – Not Used
F69A –
15 Amp Blue
BPCM
F69B – BPCM (Redundant)
F70 – 5 Amp Tan EAC
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – – Not Used
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F74 – – Not Used
171
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / Rear ICS
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect / DCSD / Telematics
F77A –
10 Amp Red
Rear Entertainment / Media HUB / 3RD & 2ND Row USB CHRG /
Vacuum Cleaner SW Backlight / 3RD Row Recliner SW Backlight /
2ND Row Stow N Go SW Backlight / LT&RT Sliding Door Backlight
F77B – B. Sunroof / Rain sensor / Rear View Mirror / PIM
F78A –
15 Amp Blue
Transmission Control Module (TCM) / Electric Power Steering 2 /
E-Shifter / ESM
F78B – Instrument Cluster
F79A –
10 Amp Red
ICS / Frt & Rr HVAC / EPB Sw / SCCM
F79B – Not Used
F80 – 5 Amp Tan OBCM
F81 – 5 Amp Tan APM
F82 – – Not Used
F83 – – Not Used
F84 – – Not Used
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Used
F87 – – Not Used
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats
F90 – 5 Amp Tan EBCM - ECU
F91 – 15 Amp Blue Front Ventilated Seats/Heated Steering Wheel
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
172
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
F92A – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F92B – – Not Used
F93 – – Not Used
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC - Motor Pump
F95A –
10 Amp Red
USB Charge Only Port
F95B – Selectable Fuse Location
F96 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (Airbag)
F98 – – Not Used
F99 – – Not Used
F100A –
10 Amp Red
QVPM
F100B –
Rr Camera / LBSS / RBSS / CVPM / Humidity Snsr / In Car Temp
Snsr
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seat (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp Power Seat (Pass)*
CB3 – Not Used
* 30A mini fuse is substituted for 25A Circuit
Breaker.
173
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
NOTE:
Your vehicle is not equipped with a jack or spare tire.
This section describes wheel removal and
installation.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it
to a ser vice center where it can be raised on a
lift.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
WARNING!
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice
or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diago-
nally opposite the jacking position. For example,
if the right front wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Wheel Blocked
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
174
WARNING!
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
• Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle
when it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised
on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jack-
ing Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts
by turning them to the left one turn while the
wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on
each side of the vehicle body indicated by the
triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the
jack is fully engaged.
Warning Label
Jack Engagement Locations
175
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
3. Raise the jack until the jack head is properly
engaged in the described location. Do not raise
the vehicle until you are sure the jack is se-
curely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by using the jack. Raise the
vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to remove the
desired tire. Minimum tire lift provides maxi-
mum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with
wheel covers, remove the cover from the wheel
by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off. Then
pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the wheel back onto the vehicle once
ready.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
Front Jacking Location Engaged
Rear Jacking Location Engaged
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
176
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if
the inflatable spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
7. Secure the wheel to the hub by tightening the
nuts with wrench. Once the vehicle is lowered
you will have a second opportunity to “torque”
the lug nuts.
8. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for in-
creased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened twice.
Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for proper wheel lug nut torque.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an autho-
rized dealer or at a service station.
9. Lower the jack to its fully lowered position.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the de-
flated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels
with wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the
mounting studs which are on each side of the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the lug nuts.
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by
hand, snapping the cover over the two lug nuts.
Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install
the cover.
Installing Tire
Wheel Cover Installation
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
177
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush
onto the hub and there is no play. The nuts will
have to be fully tightened once the vehicle is
lowered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel
under vehicle load can damage the threads,
cause vibration, and undermine safety.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for in-
creased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened twice.
Refer to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for proper wheel lug nut torque.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an autho-
rized dealer or at a service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts
are properly seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel sits flush
onto the hub and there is no play. The nuts will
have to be fully tightened once the vehicle is
lowered. Tightening an improperly seated wheel
under vehicle load can damage the threads,
cause vibration, and undermine safety.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for in-
creased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star
pattern until each nut has been tightened twice.
Refer to “Torque Specifications” in the “Techni-
cal Specifications” section for proper wheel lug
nut torque. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench
by your authorized dealer or at a service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts
are properly seated against the wheel.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
178
TIRE SERVICE KIT —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service
Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire
tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign
objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be re-
moved from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in
outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F
(-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles
(160 km) with a maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is
stored in the storage bin located behind the rear
cargo trim panel.
Tire Service Kit And Components And Opera-
tion
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this
position for air pump operation only.
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit (Top View)
1 — Power Plug
2 — Mode Select Knob
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Switch
5 — Deflation Button
Tire Service Kit (Bottom View)
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Hose Attachments
3 — Sealant/Air Hose
179
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button once to turn On
the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button again to turn the Tire Service Kit off.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air pressure
in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior to
the expiration date (printed at the lower right hand
corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum
operation of the system. Refer to “Sealant Bottle
Replacement” in this section.
• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use and
needs to be replaced after each use. Always re-
place these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily
be peeled off and properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before connect-
ing the Tire Service Kit.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to
seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter
in the tread/contact surface of your vehicle’s tires.
• The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to seal
punctures on the tires' side walls.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment
(on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport
balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use
only the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select
Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such items
to avoid injecting sealant into them.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the oc-
cupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries that
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
180
WARNING!
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita-
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains la-
tex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehi-
cle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service K it Hose
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service
Kit flat on the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air pump.
Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle the
ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next
to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into
the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails)
from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The De-
flated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning the Tire
Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the Sealant
Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle
through the Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0
– 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service
Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of
debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the valve
stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob is in the
Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push
the Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
181
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the vehicle is running be-
fore turning the Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to previ-
ous use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer f lowing through hose (typically takes 30 -
70 seconds). As the sealant flows through the
Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge can read as
high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi
(4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when the
Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle is empty.
Continue to operate the pump and inflate the
tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on
the tire and loading information label located in
the driver-side door opening. Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the rec-
ommended inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service
Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire Ser-
vice Kit and place sticker on the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose from
the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at
the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service
Kit in the vehicle storage location. Proceed to
“Drive Vehicle.”
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the
tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant
within the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is re-
paired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning
can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
Have the tire checked as soon as possible at your
authorized dealer.
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You
Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” in this section before
continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
182
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next
to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug into
the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at the end
of the hose onto the valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to the Air
Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the cold tire inf lation pres-
sure found on the tire and loading information
label located in the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the De-
flation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before con-
tinuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage
area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
at the earliest opportunity at an authorized
dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the steer-
ing wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Sealant
Bottle Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
3. Remove the bottle cover.
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
NOTE:
• For sealant bottle installation, follow these steps
reverse order.
• Replacement sealant bottles are available at au-
thorized service centers.
183
JUMP STARTING
The vehicle requires its 12V battery power to "turn-
on" the vehicle's high voltage batter y. The high
voltage battery is used to charge the 12V battery,
provide electric vehicle operation, and to start the
vehicle's gas engine. If the 12V battery has been
discharged, the vehicle can be "jump started" using
a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack.
If the vehicle's high voltage battery has also been
discharged, it will need to be recharged before the
vehicle can be started:
• If the vehicle can be connected to a Level 1 or
Level 2 charger where it is currently parked, the
vehicle will still require a "jump start" to allow the
vehicle to begin the battery charging process.
Once the vehicle charging has begun (indicated
by the charge status indicator on top the vehicle's
instrument panel), the jumper cables can be re-
moved from the vehicle jump posts.
• If the vehicle cannot be connected to a Level 1 or
Level 2 charger where it is currently parked, the
vehicle can be moved by connecting 12V power to
the vehicle's "jump posts" and then shifting the
transmission from PARK into NEUTRAL. Power
provided by the jumper cables will also allow the
electric park brake to be released. Carefully move
the vehicle to a Level 1 or Level 2 charge location.
While the vehicle is being moved, the external 12V
power must remained connected to the vehicle
jump posts.
NOTE:
Be careful when moving the vehicle - ensure that
control of the vehicle is maintained. Also, ensure
that vehicle is secured to prevent unintentional
movement during and after moving the vehicle. If
the external 12V power becomes disconnected
from the vehicle jump posts or there is an interrup-
tion of the 12V power while moving the vehicle, the
vehicle's transmission may engage PARK.
When the vehicle is at the charging location, shift
the transmission back to PARK, apply the electric
park brake, and start the high voltage battery charg-
ing. Once the vehicle has been secured against
unintentional movement and high voltage battery
charging has been initiated, the jumper cables can
be removed from the vehicle jump posts.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section care-
fully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
184
Preparations For Jump Start
The remote battery posts in your vehicle is located
on the left side of the engine compartment.
WARNING!
You can be seriously injured or killed working on
or around a motor vehicle:
• Keep hands away from the radiator cooling fan
when the hood is raised. The fan starts auto-
matically and may start at any time, whether
the engine is running or not.
• Remove any jewelry such as rings, watches and
bracelets that could make an inadvertent elec-
trical contact.
• Keep open flames or sparks away from the
battery. Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen
gas which is flammable and explosive.
1. Apply the parking brake and place the ignition to
OFF.
NOTE:
If the 12V Battery has been sufficiently dis-
charged, this may not be possible.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary
electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the 12V
electrical system, park the vehicle within the
jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and per-
sonal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property dam-
age due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
Jump Starting Locations
(+) — Remote Positive Post
(-) — Remote Negative Post
185
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
to the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative post near
the windshield cowl (exposed metal post of the
discharged vehicle).
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to ex-
plode and could result in personal injury. Only
use the specific ground point, do not use any
other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the vehicle that has the booster battery, let
the vehicle run a few minutes, and then cycle the
ignition to ON/RUN in the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
6. Once the ignition is cycled to ON/RUN, select
the gear that is needed for moving the vehicle. In
most instances of an emergency, this would be
neutral. Once the proper gear is selected, re-
move the jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from remote negative post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power out-
lets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Even-
tually, if plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge
sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or pre-
vent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN
EMERGENCY
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is located
with the spare tire (if equipped) or in the upper
storage bin. If your vehicle is out of fuel and an
auxiliary fuel can is needed, insert the funnel into
the filler neck and proceed to fill the vehicle.
For more information on the Cap-Less Fuel System
refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And
Operating” in this manual.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
186
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the appro-
priate action.
On the highways — slow down.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling sys-
tem and turning the A/C off can help remove this
heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maxi-
mum heat, the mode control to f loor and the
blower control to high. This allows the heater core
to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in
removing heat from the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
WARNING!
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never tr y to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the vehicle off
immediately, and call for service.
FREEING A STUCK
VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow,
it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear the area
around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth
between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently press-
ing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL
for more than half a second, you must press the
brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion without spin-
ning the wheels or holding down the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE:
Push the "ESC Off" switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC ) system in "Partial Off"
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch
again to restore "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
187
WARNING!
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continu-
ously without stopping when you are stuck and
do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
CAUTION!
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
• Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to trans-
mission overheating and failure. It can also
damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
• Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after
CAUTION!
every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed
ALL BEST METHOD
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
188
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars
and other equipment designed for this purpose,
following equipment manufacturer’s instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar
or other towing device to main structural members
of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack-
ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under
tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature
is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear
wheels are on the ground), to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park
Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-
tomer programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electri-
cal failure when the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is
engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the
rear wheels off the ground when moving the ve-
hicle onto a flatbed.
The manufacturer recommends towing your ve-
hicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle
must towed with the front wheels OFF the ground
(using a towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with
the front wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery
Points that can be used to recover a disabled ve-
hicle, located on the underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
• Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are prop-
erly seated and secured in the attachment points.
• This recovery tow feature should be used by a
trained professional only.
• Use approved receptacle location to free the dis-
abled vehicle from its environment.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
• Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
• Is used only to provide recovery of the
vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
• Is NOT to be used for transporting the ve-
hicle over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
• Be applied at constant speed.
Front Recovery Points
189
CAUTION!
• Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
• Not be an abrupt acceleration.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters,
etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and
brake pedal is released). If you are towing this ve-
hicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you
must manually disable the Electric Park Brake each
time the driver's door is opened, by pressing the
brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling-type equipment when tow-
ing. Vehicle damage may occur.
CAUTION!
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension com-
ponents. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Enhanced
Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
190
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that ser vice is required for your vehicle. Op-
erating conditions such as frequent short-trips, or
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” mes-
sage is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can
cause the change oil message to illuminate as early
as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset.Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
Even though the vehicle may not have been driven,
both the fuel in the tank and oil in the engine will still
degrade over time. Additionally, there will be a no-
tification to the driver if the engine is being run to
maintain the oil and fuel systems.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change in-
dicator message after completing the scheduled oil
change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by
someone other than your authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to “Vehicle Info”
in “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” For further information, re-
fer to your Owner’s Manual.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first.
The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally
only a concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is oper-
ated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low
engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is consid-
ered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and
brake master cylinder, fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the follow-
ing page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter
• Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals
as required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
• Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
191
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if necessary. X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.(**) X
Flush and replace the engine, power electronics, and battery coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km), whichever comes first.(***)
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
(**) The spark plug change inter val is mileage
based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
(***) Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems prop-
erly could lead to severe internal damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact your local authorized dealer.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
192
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your ve-
hicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is oper-
ated in a dusty and off road environment. This type
of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
193
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — HYBRID
1 — Battery Coolant Reservoir*
2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
5 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal
6 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7 — Engine Air Cleaner
8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
9 — Power Electronics Coolant Reservoir*
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
* See your authorized dealer for service.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
194
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle,
go to an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safet y Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identifi-
cation Numbers, Tire Terminology and Definitions,
Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size desig-
nation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this stan-
dard have the tire size molded into the sidewall
beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is
absent from this tire size designation. Example:
215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
U.S. design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size desig-
nation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1—U.S.DOT
Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum
Load
2 — Size Designa-
tion
5 — Maximum
Pressure
3 — Service De-
scription
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and Tem-
perature Grades
195
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 =LoadIndex
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road
conditions, and posted speed limits)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
196
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent
the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
197
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Infla-
tion pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
198
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your ve-
hicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carr ying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire
size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on
the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Ve-
hicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
199
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of oc-
cupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight
(if applicable) should never exceed the weight ref-
erenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehi-
cle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of lug-
gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-
hicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load capac-
ity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter-
mine how this reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• Trailer towing is not permitted with this vehicle.
• The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load and cargo/luggage capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate
for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
200
201
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over-
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle han-
dling, and increase your stopping distance. Use
tires of the recommended load capacity for your
vehicle. Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four pri-
mary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cush-
ion shock. Objects on the road and chuck-
holes can cause damage that result in tire
failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, result-
ing in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your ve-
hicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause
the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resis-
tance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause ab-
normal wear patterns and reduced tread life, result-
ing in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncom-
fortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
202
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation.
Tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will pre-
vent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are al-
ways “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation
pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide
range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures
vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa)
per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this
in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage,
especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and
the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold
tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi
(21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(7°C) for this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to
40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be
too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven
at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation
pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure
and reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a col-
lision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four.
Never combine them with other t ypes of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
203
• The puncture is no greater than a
1
∕
4
of an inch
(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as
it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid
loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation
is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat
mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or
below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches
the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities
and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat
tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed
to be reused when driven under run flat mode
(14 psi (96 kPa)) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run
flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more
information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continu-
ously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's
wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more
than 30 seconds continuously when you are
WARNING!
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,
the tire should be replaced.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2—NewTire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
204
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inf lation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop
across the tire tread. These abnormal wear pat-
terns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for
earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle
scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Fail-
ure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire
failure. You could lose control and have a colli-
sion resulting in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from
contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size,
quality and performance when replacement is
needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certifi-
cation Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will
be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Safety Information” section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifi-
cations match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any ques-
tions you may have on tire specifications or capabil-
ity. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may
adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of
your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension di-
mensions and performance characteristics, re-
sulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose con-
trol and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
205
WARNING!
sizes with load ratings approved for your ve-
hicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire overload-
ing and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sud-
den tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and odom-
eter readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels
may vary between different all season tires. All sea-
son tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or
MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season
tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may ad-
versely affect the safety and handling of your ve-
hicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed
for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter
tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures
are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designa-
tion or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire side-
wall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe
WARNING!
injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions
also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the countr y require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire side-
wall.
If you need snow tires, se-
lect tires equivalent in size
and type to the original
equipment tires. Use
snow tires only in sets of
four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety
and handling of your ve-
hicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
206
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capabilit y on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some
states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws
should be checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In
Case Of Emergency” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may re-
sult.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual
for restrictions when towing with a spare tire desig-
nated for temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in
the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has
this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use
only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped
with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire
description on the Tire and Loading Information
Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or
on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de-
scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding
the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since
the wheel is designed specifically for the compact
spare tire. Do not install more than one compact
spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given
time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tempo-
rary emergency use only. With these spares, do
not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo-
rary use spares have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped
with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire
207
description on the Tire and Loading Information
Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or
on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-
17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and
reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is prop-
erly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible
tire using the electric air pump before lowering the
vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the col-
lapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for tempo-
rary emergency use only. With these spares, do
not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Tempo-
rary use spares have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced.
WARNING!
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators,
the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects ve-
hicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the origi-
nal equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire infla-
tion pressures listed on your Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door.
Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your ve-
hicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
208
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain
their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels
with the same soap solution recommended for the
body of the vehicle and remember to always wash
when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused
by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, cal-
cium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used
to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft
cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away
promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff
brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective
coating that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners
and automatic car washes may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including ex-
cessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selec-
tion of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equip-
ment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar
Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome Cleaner or
their equivalent is recommended or select a non-
abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake
components. This activity will remove the red rust
on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration
when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abra-
sives, or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis; this is all that is required to
maintain this finish.
209
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories were
established by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration. The specific grade
rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in
each category is shown on the sidewall of
the tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing, based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. These grades repre-
sent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave-
ment, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire's resis-
tance to the generation of heat and its abil-
ity to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and re-
duce tire life, and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance,
which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
210
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
211
WHEEL AND TIRE
TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should
be torqued using a properly calibrated torque
wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mount-
ing the tire and remove any corrosion or loose
particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the
socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not
insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
Torque Pattern
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
212
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engines 16.5 Gallons 62 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-20 , API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6 Liter Engine Coolant (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula with deion-
ized, or distilled water for proper corrosion protection)
14.6 Quarts 13.8 Liters
Battery Coolant (Contact an authorized dealer for
service)
4.2 Quarts 4.0 Liters
Power Electronics Coolant (Contact an authorized
dealer for service)
3.7 Quarts 3.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
NOTE:
Battery Coolant and Power Electronics Coolant res-
ervoir require a special tool to service the coolant
system. Contact an authorized dealer for service.
213
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) with deionized, or distilled water for proper
corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Battery Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) with deionized, or distilled water for proper
corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Power Electric Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) with deionized, or distilled water for proper
corrosion protection or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
214
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may re-
sult in engine damage and may decrease cor-
rosion protection. Organic Additive Technol-
ogy (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Ad-
ditive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” cool-
CAUTION!
ant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling sys-
tem in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
CAUTION!
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products,
as they may not be compatible with the radia-
tor engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If
DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only
recommended brake fluids.
Refrigerant Use only refrigerant R-1234yf
Charge Amount:
A/C System — 907g (2.0 lb)
Compressor Oil Use only POE:
A/C System — 225 ml
215
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
• The following highlights just some of the many
Authentic Chrysler Accessories by Mopar featur-
ing a fit, finish, and functionality specifically for
your Chrysler Pacifica Hybrid.
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far
more than expressive style, premium protection,
or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from
enhancing your vehicle with accessories that have
been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Chrysler Accessories
by Mopar visit your local dealership or online at
mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for
Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
EXTERIOR:
• Front Air Deflector • Body Side Molding • Molded Splash Guards
• Wheel Locks • Roof Rack • Side Window Air Deflectors
• Molded Running Boards • License Plate Frames • Mastershield Paint Sealant
• Mastershield Undercoating
INTERIOR:
• Premium Carpet Floor Mats • Door Sill Guards • Emergency First Aid Kit
• Mastershield Fabric Protection • Premium Carpet Cargo Mat • Cargo Area Liner
• Mastershield Leather Protection • All Weather (Slush) Mat • Roadside Emergency Kit
• Storage Totes And Coolers • All Weather (Slush) Cargo Mat • Spare Tire Kit
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
216
ELECTRONICS:
• Remote Start • Mopar Connect (WiFi) • Wireless Phone Charger
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System • Overhead DVD Player Media System
CARRIERS:
• Hitch-mount Bike Carrier • Roof Mount Bike Carrier • Roof Mount Cargo Carrier
• Roof Mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Tent Kit • Roof Mount Canoe Carrier
• Roof Mount Surf & Paddle Board Carrier • Roof Mount Kayak Carrier • Pet Kennel
217
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless networks.
These networks allow your vehicle to send and re-
ceive information. This information allows systems
and features in your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology con-
tinues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, work-
ing with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropri-
ate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software updates
to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthor-
ized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most
recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could possi-
bly contain malicious software, and if installed
in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility
for vehicle systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and mini-
mize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle
owners should:
– Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(U.S. Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media devices
(e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to ”Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diag-
nostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual.
MULTIMEDIA
218
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL
INFORMATION
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The steering wheel audio controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel.
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for the next
listenable station or select the next or previous CD
track.
• Push the button in the center to select the next
preset station (radio) or to change CDs if
equipped with a CD Player.
Right Switch
• Push the switch up or down to increase or decrease
the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change modes
AM/FM/CD/SXM.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly while driv-
ing. Reception may be interfered with by the pres-
ence of mountains, buildings or bridges, especially
when you are far away from the broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving traf-
fic alerts and news.
Care And Maintenance
Observe the following precautions to ensure the
system is fully operational:
• The display lens should not come into contact with
pointed or rigid objects which could damage its
surface; use a soft, dry, anti-static cloth to clean
and do not press.
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to clean the
display lens.
• Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this
could damage it beyond repair.
Anti-Theft Protection
The system is equipped with an anti-theft protec-
tion system based on the exchange of information
with the electronic control unit (Body Computer)
on the vehicle. This guarantees maximum safety.
If the check has a positive outcome, the system will
start to operate. See an authorized dealer for further
information.
AUX/USB/MP3
CONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located throughout
the vehicle. This feature allows an external USB
device to be plugged into the USB port.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
The data USB ports are located on the instrument
panel below the climate controls.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
219
There are multiple USB “charge only” ports in this
vehicle.
• In the center console
NOTE:
The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument
panel can be switched from “ignition” only to con-
stant “battery” powered all the time. See an autho-
rized dealer for details.
• On the back of the front row seats in the Uconnect
Theater Media hubs
• Above the rear cup holders in the third row of seats
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB
Ports
1 — USB Port
2 — Aux Jack
Center Console USB Charging Port
3rd Row USB Charging Port
MULTIMEDIA
220
UCONNECT THEATER —
IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect Theater Overview
Your Uconnect Theater is designed to give your
family years of enjoyment.
There are multiple ways to interact with your
Uconnect Theater system;
• Play your favorite CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs
• Plug and play a variety of standard video games or
devices into the HDMI port
• Listen to audio over the wireless headphones
• Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video
USB port
• Plug in standard headphones to listen to audio
• Project your mobile phone, or tablet screen onto
the rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens — If
Equipped
Getting Started
There are three different ways to operate the fea-
tures of the Uconnect Theater:
• The Remote Control
• The Uconnect System
• The Individual Uconnect Theater Touchscreens
Pairing The Remote
If the remote needs to be paired to your Uconnect
Theater system, follow the procedure below:
1. Install batteries into both remotes.
2. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right
portion of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
3. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom
of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the
settings menu.
4. Press the “Pair Remote” option. Press the “OK”
button. A touchscreen notification will appear
indicating that your remote has been paired suc-
cessfully or unsuccessfully.
Uconnect Theater Screen (Rear
Touchscreens)
1 — Uconnect Theater Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
3 — Uconnect Theater Media Hub (AUX
Output, HDMI Input, USB Charge Only
Port)
221
5. Test to make sure the remote is successfully
paired by dragging your finger across the ges-
ture pad. If you do not see the on screen arrow,
try using the “Screen” button on the remote to
switch between rear screen one and rear screen
two to make sure the remote is controlling the
intended screen. It may take several seconds for
the remote to react when initially paired.
NOTE:
• If pairing fails, try resetting the remote by pushing
and holding the Play/Pause, Down arrow, and the
Screen button simultaneously for about five sec-
onds until the back light flashes.
• If the remote is ever non-operational, try re-
pairing the remote.
• The system can accommodate up to ten paired
remote controls.
Unpairing The Remote
In events such as updating the Uconnect Theater
software, or taking a remote to another vehicle, the
remote will need to be unpaired from your
Uconnect Theater system. To unpair the remote:
1. Press the Settings icon found in the lower right
portion of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
2. Press the “Remote” button towards the bottom
of the Uconnect Theater touchscreen, within the
settings menu.
3. Select “Manage Remote Controls” from the Re-
mote section of "Settings” and follow the on
screen instructions to complete the unpairing
process.
4. Once complete, the remote will be ready to pair
again.
NOTE:
There will be a touchscreen notification message
when unpairing is successful. Repeat the above
steps to unpair a second remote.
Uconnect Theater Remote Control
1. Gesture Pad — Control pointer position by run-
ning your finger over this area and tapping to
select items on the touchscreen, functions similar
to a computer/laptop mouse.
2. Mute Button — Mutes headphone audio.
3. Home Button — Push to access available
“Sources”.
4. Arrow Buttons — Push the arrow
buttons to highlight an item or scroll through
menus.
5. Fast Forward Button
— Push and hold
to fast forward through the current audio track or
video chapter. Push once to skip to the next
track.
6. Play/Pause Button
|| — Begin/resume or
pause disc play.
7. Fast Rewind Button
— Push and hold to
fast rewind through the current audio track or
video chapter. Push once to revert back to the
previous track.
8. OK Button — Push to select the highlighted
option in a menu.
Remote Control
MULTIMEDIA
222
9. Screen Selector Button — Push the screen se-
lector to toggle between screen 1 (Driver Side),
or screen 2 (Passenger Side).
10. Back Button — Push to exit out of menus or
return to previous screen.
11. Power Button — Turns the screen for the se-
lected channel on or off.
12. Screen Indicator — Indicates which screen (1 or
2) is being controlled by the remote control.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for
operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of
the remote, then slide the battery cover
downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery re-
cycling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside
the battery compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF ) devices equipped in this ve-
hicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Play A DVD/Blu-ray Or USB Media
File From Uconnect System
1. Insert a Blu-ray disc or DVD disc into the disc
player with the label facing up, or insert a USB
drive into rear Video USB port.
NOTE:
The DVD/Blu-ray Disc player and Video USB
port are both located under the radio controls in
the instrument panel.
2. Press the “Uconnect Theater” button on the ra-
dio touchscreen.
3. Select Disc or USB from the source controls (i.e.
select the desired source from the “Select Input
1” or “Select Input 2” menu for the respective
screen).
4. For DVD/Blu-ray disc – press the “Press to En-
ter” feature in the Movie Snapshot on the radio
touchscreen, then press “OK” on the following
screen. The steps to start a DVD are dependent
on the steps required by that specific DVD. For
USB Media Files - Press Music, Movie, or Fold-
ers, then select media title from list(s).
223
5. To play a DVD/Blu-ray disc on both screens
simultaneously, select “Disc” from both screen
drop downs, or choose “Disc Source” on one
screen and push the “View Screen” button on the
other.
NOTE:
After selecting “Press to Enter” or the Movie Snap-
shot, the control functions for that screen appears.
These controls only apply to the individual screen
selected and include:
1. Power
Press to turn “Selected Screen” On/Off.
2. Mute
Mute rear headphones for selected source for
the current ignition cycle. Pressing mute again
will unmute rear headphones.
3. Lock
Press to enable/disable Remote Control func-
tions and Rear Touchscreen Controls for the
selected source.
4. View
Select this button to view full screen video if
vehicle is not moving. Button is disabled when
not viewing a video source or when the vehicle
is in motion.
DVD Blu-ray Disc Player
1 — Disc Player (Rear)
2 — Rear Video USB Port
Source Controls From The Uconnect
System — Uconnect Theater
Media Control Screen
MULTIMEDIA
224
5. Listen In
Select this button to play one of the rear
screens audio over the vehicle’s audio system.
NOTE:
To view video content on the radio screen, bring the
vehicle to a stop.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio disc, CD Data disc,
DVD or Blu-ray, pushing the remote control’s arrow
buttons will navigate the cursor on the rear touch-
screen in the desired direction, on whichever touch-
screen is selected. The UP, DOWN, LEFT, and
RIGHT arrow buttons, and the OK and MENU
buttons on the remote, along with the correspond-
ing buttons overlaid on the radio touchscreen, can
be used to navigate the disc menu when it appears.
This can be used to select specific chapters in a
movie, navigate special features, or to play the
movie from the menu.
NOTE:
Inserting a disc into the player will “auto play” the
disc if already in the "Disc" source menu on the rear
screens, and the disc supports “auto play.”
Uconnect Theater Apps
Select the Apps source card to play pre-loaded
games. Pressing the “Help” button teaches users
how to play each game. Pick from games:
• Back Seat Bingo
• Checkers
• Hanging Fruit
• License Plate Game
• Math Flash Cards
• Solitaire
• Sudoku
• Tic Tac Toe
NOTE:
To exit a game, press “Exit Button” then “Back Ar-
row,” or “Home Button” on the touchscreen.
Apps Home Screen
Sudoku App Home Screen
225
Are We There Yet? — Uconnect 4C NAV
When a navigation route has been set from the
Uconnect system, the second row passengers can
use “Are We There Yet?” for an animated screen
showing distance and time remaining on navigation
routes, as well as the estimated time of arrival with
pop-up notifications. Notifications and their fre-
quency can be set up for route information by using
the arrow buttons, and can be turned on and off
using the “Notifications” button on the “Are We
There Yet?” App. Estimated time of arrival notifica-
tions pop-up at the bottom center of the screen.
Using The Rear Video USB Port
Plug in a USB drive, iPhone, iPod or mass storage
device and play your favorite music or movies.
NOTE:
To view USB media on the rear theater screens,
insert a USB drive into the port next to the DVD/
Blu-ray disc player. The USB drive port is located
under the radio controls in the instrument panel.
On the rear screen you can browse the content of
the USB device by going to the USB source. Use
the search feature to find your music faster.
Are We There Yet? App
Rear Video USB Port
Search Screen
MULTIMEDIA
226
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the HDMI 1 or
2 ports, located behind the first row seat.
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games will exceed the
power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter. Refer to
“Power Inverter” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
in this guide for further information.
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of
audio using an infrared transmitter from the video
screens.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume
control, there are a number of things that can be
done to troubleshoot the issue:
• Verify that the screen is turned on.
• Check to see that the channel is not muted.
• Make sure that the headphones are on.
• Verify that the headphone channel selector button
is on the desired channel. This button switches
between the audio of screen 1 and screen 2.
• Install two new AAA type batteries in the
headphones.
The headphone power indicator and controls are
located on the right ear cup.
AUX/HDMI/USB
1 — AUX Jack (Headphone Output Only)
2 — HDMI Port
3 — USB Port (Charge Only)
Uconnect Theater Headphones
1 — Power ON/OFF Button
2 — Volume Control Wheel
3 — Channel Selection Button
227
NOTE:
Uconnect Theater must be turned on before sound
can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn
off approximately three minutes after the Uconnect
Theater system is turned off.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
1. Ensure the remote control and the headphones
are on the same channel.
2. Push the Home button on the remote control.
3. When the Home menu appears on the touch-
screen, use the arrow buttons on the remote
control to navigate to the available modes and
push the OK button to select the new mode or
use the Gesture Pad at the top of the remote
control.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batter-
ies for operation.
To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear
cup of the headphones, and then slide the bat-
tery cover downward.
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery re-
cycling procedures for your area.
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown inside
the battery compartment.
4. Replace the battery compartment cover.
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited War-
ranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty
covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or "your")
of this particular Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”) wireless head-
phone ("Product"). The warranty is not transfer-
able.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This war-
ranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as
specified below, this warranty covers any Product
that in normal use is defective in workmanship or
materials.
Uconnect Theater Headphones
1 — Volume Control Wheel
2 — Channel Selection Button
MULTIMEDIA
228
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This war-
ranty does not cover any damage or defect that
results from misuse, abuse or modification of the
Product other than by Aptiv. Foam earpieces, which
will wear over time through normal use, are specifi-
cally not covered (replacement foam is available for
a nominal charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR
ANY INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS
OR PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE
OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE
PRODUCT, NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY
GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, IN-
CIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEM-
PLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF
ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER.
Some states and jurisdictions may not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, so the above limitation may not apply to
you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights.
You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will repair
or replace any defective Product. Aptiv reserves the
right to replace any discontinued Product with a
comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE
SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT,
SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY
REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS, AND
IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER W ARRANTIES (EX-
PRESS OR IMPLIED ), INCL UDING ANY WAR-
RANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding
your Aptiv wireless headphones, please email
[email protected] or phone:
888-293-3332
Display Settings
When watching a video source, pressing “Settings”
icon on the touchscreen activates the Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the
video on the screen. The factory default settings are
already set for optimum viewing, so there is no need
to change these settings under normal circum-
stances.
To change the settings, use one of the touchscreens
or remote. To reset all values back to the original
settings, select “Reset to Defaults”, then select
“YES.”
Wireless Streaming — If Equipped
Your Uconnect Theater System may be equipped
with Wireless Streaming functionality that allows
you to project your smartphone or tablet onto your
rear Uconnect Theater touchscreens. This Source
Card will allow you to wirelessly link your compatible
Android devices to your Uconnect Theater system
and stream your device onto the touchscreens.
Choose the Wireless Streaming Source Card on
your rear Uconnect Theater touchscreen.
The first row passengers can also access wireless
streaming by choosing the source in the Uconnect
Theater menu on the front Uconnect touchscreen.
Wireless Streaming Source Card
229
NOTE:
For system compatibility, consult your device's
Owner's Manual or www.uconnectphone.com to
see if your device supports wireless streaming tech-
nology compatibility. Apple devices do not support
this feature.
To link your device to the rear Uconnect Theater
touchscreens:
1. Enable your device’s Wi-Fi.
2. Select the Wireless Streaming feature on your
device. The name of this feature is device de-
pendent and could include: mirror, cast or smart
view.
NOTE:
Refer to your device's Owners Manual or
www.uconnectphone.com for further informa-
tion.
3. Select “Pacifica Wireless Network” from the list
of available networks on your device.
4. When prompted by an Authentication Screen,
press “Accept” on the touchscreen to begin
wireless streaming on your device. If prompted,
verify that the code on the rear touchscreen and
the device match.
Your phone will be added as an additional source
card on the Uconnect Theater touchscreens.
NOTE:
The Authentication Screen will appear on both rear
touchscreens. The touchscreen screen on which
“Accept” is selected will be the primary controller
for the wireless streaming session.
NOTE:
• Some devices will allow you to control your device
through the Uconnect Theater rear touchscreens.
They will react to your selections from the touch-
screen and be represented on your device as well.
When supported, the Uconnect Theater task bar
will appear at the top and bottom of the Uconnect
Theater touchscreen, framing your streaming de-
vice.
• Devices that do not support this feature will not
respond to Uconnect Theater touchscreen but
can still be controlled using the streaming device.
Streaming Source On Front Uconnect
Touchscreen
Streaming Device Source Card
MULTIMEDIA
230
Settings
Below is a list of the settings available for the Wire-
less Streaming feature of your Uconnect Theater
system:
• Wireless: ON/OFF – Turn on and off the wireless
feature of the Uconnect Theater system.
• Manage Devices – Allows the user to delete the
paired devices.
• Local Network Name – Allows the user to rename
the Pacifica Wireless Network.
Refer to the Wireless Streaming video on the
Uconnect YouTube Channel at
www.youtube.com/
DriveUconnect for tips and additional information
on the Wireless Streaming function.
Wireless Streaming Settings
231
IF YOU NEED
ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vi-
tally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. The manufac-
turer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factory-
trained technicians, special tools, and the latest in-
formation to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly
and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be
resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer's cus-
tomer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's cus-
tomer center should include the following informa-
tion:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
232
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Tele-
communication Devices for the Deaf) equipment
at its customer center. Any hearing or speech im-
paired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that re-
quire assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletype-
writer users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial
1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service
operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufac-
turer stands behind only the manufacturer's service
contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service
contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an
Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manu-
facturer's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer's service con-
tract. It is not responsible for any service contract
other than the manufacturer's ser vice contract. If
you purchased a service contract that is not a manu-
facturer's ser vice contract, and you require service
after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty expires, please refer to the contract docu-
ments, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major invest-
ment when you purchased the vehicle. An autho-
rized dealer has also made a major investment in
facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are
absolutely delighted with the ownership experience.
You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to
resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain ve-
hicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other repro-
ductive harm.
233
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
that could cause a crash or cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, an authorized dealer or FCA US
LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Cana-
dian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc .ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's Manual,
United States customers may visit the Chrysler
Contact Us page at www.chrysler.com scroll to the
bottom of the page and select the “Contact Us”
link, then select the “Owner’s Manual and
Glove Compartment Material” from the left
menu. You can also purchase a copy by calling
1-800-247-9753 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you prefer,
additional printed copies of the Owner's
Manual, may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com (U.S.) or by calling
1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada).
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic
files are also available on the Chrysler, Jeep, Ram
Truck, Dodge and SRT websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select “Owner/
Service Manuals”. Then select your desired model
year and vehicle from the drop down lists.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
234
Accessories ...................216
Mopar ....................216
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control) ...................147
Additives, Fuel..................163
AirBag .....................106
Air Bag Operation ..............108
Air Bag Warning Light .........105, 108
Driver Knee Air Bag .............112
Enhanced Accident Response .....116, 190
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ........190
FrontAirBag ................108
If Deployment Occurs ............116
Knee Impact Bolsters .............112
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ......117
Maintenance .................117
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .....106
Side Air Bags .................113
Transporting Pets ..............134
Air Bag Light ..............77, 105, 135
Air Conditioning .................53
Air Conditioning Filter ..............59
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ........58
Air Conditioning System .............53
Air Pressure
Tires.....................202
Alarm
Arm The System ...............25
Disarm The System ..............26
Security Alarm ................79
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........213
Anti-Lock Warning Light .............81
Audio Jack....................219
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...........43
Automatic Headlights ..............45
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .....53
Automatic Transaxle...............144
Automatic Transmission
Adding Fluid .................215
Fluid Type ..................215
AUXCord....................219
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ....71
Axle Lubrication .................215
Back
-Up Camera ................158
Battery .....................9,78
Charging ...................10
Charging System Light ............78
Jump Starting ................184
Belts, Seat ....................135
Blind Spot Monitoring ..............87
B-Pillar Location.................199
Brake Fluid ....................215
Brake System
Fluid Check .................215
Parking ....................143
Warning Light .................77
Bulb Replacement ................166
Bulbs, Light .................137, 166
Camera .....................158
Camera, Rear ................158, 159
Capacities, Fluid .................213
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...................161, 186
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...........134
Change Oil Indicator ...............75
Changing A Flat Tire ............174, 195
Charging .....................10
Chart, Tire Sizing ................196
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety........134
Checks, Safety ..................134
INDEX
235
Child Restraint ..................118
Child Restraints
Booster Seats .................121
Center Seat LATCH .............126
Child Seat Installation ..........128, 130
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt . . .127
Infant And Child Restraints .........120
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . .122
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . .121
Seating Positions ...............122
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ......132
Cleaning
Wheels ....................209
Climate Control .................49
Rear......................56
CompactSpareTire...............207
Contract, Service ................233
Cooling System
Cooling Capacity ..............213
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .213, 214
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ........147
Cruise Light .................84, 85
Customer Assistance ..............232
Cybersecurity ..................218
Daytime Running Lights .............44
Defroster, Windshield ..............135
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ...........47
Diagnostic System, Onboard ..........86
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ...................44
Disabled Vehicle Towing ............188
Door Ajar.....................80
Door Ajar Light .................80
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..............33
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . .221
Electric Parking Brake ..............143
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control). . .146
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . .78
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ...........166
Jacking .................174, 195
Jump Starting ................184
Overheating .................187
Towing ....................188
Engine
Break-In Recommendations .........142
Compartment ................194
Compartment Identification .........194
C
oolant (Antifreeze) ............214
Exhaust Gas Caution ............134
Oil....................213, 214
Oil Selection .................213
Overheating .................187
Starting ....................138
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . .116, 190
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..............134
Exhaust System .................134
Exterior Lighting .................44
Exterior Lights .............44, 137, 166
Filters
Air Conditioning ...............59
Engine Oil ..................214
Flashers
Hazard Warning ...............166
Turn Signals .............44, 84, 137
Flash-To-Pass .................44, 45
Fluid, Brake ...................215
Fluid Capacities .................213
Fluid Leaks ....................137
Fluids And Lubricants ..............214
Fog Lights ..................44, 46
Fold-Flat Seats ..................33
Forward Collision Warning ............89
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .............187
Fuel
Additives ...................163
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .............161
Materials Added ...............163
INDEX
236
Octane Rating ................214
Specifications ................214
Tank Capacity ................213
Fuses.......................168
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .......68
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............161
General Information ...............219
Hazard Warning Flashers ............166
Headlights ....................44
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .....44
Lights On Reminder .............44
Passing ..................44, 45
Switch .....................44
Time Delay ..................44
Washers ....................46
Head Restraints ..................39
Heated Mirrors ..................43
High Voltage Battery ...............9
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .......68
HoodProp....................63
Hood Release...................63
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ..................84
Display ....................74
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .......47
Introduction ....................1
Inverter
Power .....................73
Jack Operation ...............174, 195
Jump Starting ..................184
KeyFob......................17
Arm The System ...............25
Disarm The Alarm ..............26
Keys........................17
Lane Change And Turn Signals .........44
Lane Change Assist ...............44
LaneSense ....................156
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................97
Latches......................137
Hood .....................63
Leaks, Fluid ...................137
Life Of Tires...................205
Liftgate ......................65
Power.....................66
Light Bulbs ....................137
Lights.......................137
AirBag................77, 105, 135
Automatic
Headlights ............45
Brake Warning .................77
Bulb Replacement ..............166
Cruise ...................84, 85
Daytime Running ...............44
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ..........44
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ....................78
Exterior ....................137
Fog ......................46
Headlights ..................44
High Beam/Low Beam Select ........44
Instrument Cluster ..............44
Lights On Reminder .............44
Park....................84, 85
Passing ..................44, 45
Seat Belt Reminder ..............77
Security Alarm ................79
Service ....................166
SmartBeams ..................45
Turn Signals .............44, 84, 137
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................78, 84
Loading Vehicle
Tires .....................199
Low Tire Pressure System.............91
Lug Nuts/Bolts..................212
237
Maintenance ...................63
Maintenance Schedule .............191
Manual
Service ....................234
Media Hub....................219
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ........35
Memory Seat ...................35
Mirrors ......................43
Automatic Dimming .............43
Heated ....................43
Outside ....................43
Rearview ...................43
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ..........91
Mopar Accessories ...............216
MP3 Control...................219
Multi-Function Control Lever ..........44
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..........142
Occupant Restraints ...............95
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).........214
Oil Change Indicator ...............75
Reset .....................75
Oil, Engine....................214
Capacity ...................213
Filter .....................214
Pressure Warning Light ............79
Recommendation ..............213
Viscosity ...................213
Oil Pressure Light ................79
Onboard Diagnostic System ...........86
Operating Precautions ..............86
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ...............234
Outside Rearview Mirrors ............43
Overheating, Engine ..............187
Parking Brake ..................143
ParkSense System, Rear ..........151, 154
Pets .......................134
Pinch Protection .................63
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .....199
Power
Inverter ....................73
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ......71
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch .............30, 66
P
regnant Women And Seat Belts ........102
Preparation For Jacking .............174
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..................102
Radial Ply Tires .................203
Radio Frequency
General Information ..........21, 25, 29
Rear Air Conditioning ..............56
Rear Camera ...................159
RearCrossPath................87, 88
Rear ParkSense System ...........151, 154
Recreational Towing ...............164
Release, Hood ..................63
Reminder, Lights On ...............44
Reminder, Seat Belt ...............96
Remote Control
Starting System ................24
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ................25
Disarm The Alarm ..............26
Remote Starting System .............24
Replacement Bulbs ...............166
Replacement Tires ...............205
Reporting Safet y Defects ............234
Restraints, Child .................118
Restraints, Head .................39
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..........135
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .........137
Safety Defects, Reporting............234
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...............134
Safety Information, Tire .............195
INDEX
238
Safety Tips ....................134
Schedule, Maintenance .............191
Seat Belt Reminder ................77
Seat Belts...................96, 135
Ad justable Shoulder Belt ...........99
Ad justable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . .99
Ad justable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ..................99
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . .103
Child Restraints ...............118
Energy Management Feature ........103
Extender ...................102
Front Seat ...............96, 97, 98
Inspection ..................135
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ........98
Lap/Shoulder Belts ..............97
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ........99
Operating Instructions ............98
Pregnant Women ..............102
Pretensioners .................102
Rear Seat ...................97
Reminder ...................96
Seat Belt Extender ..............102
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............102
Untwisting Procedure .............99
Seats......................33, 37
Adjustment ..................33
Heated ....................37
Memory ....................35
Rear Folding ..................33
Seatback Release ...............33
Tilting .....................33
Ventilated ...................38
Security Alarm ..................79
Arm The System ...............25
Disarm The System ..............26
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......214
Service Assistance ................232
Service Contract.................233
Service Manuals .................234
Shoulder Belts ..................97
Side View Mirror Adjustment ..........43
Signals, Turn ...............44, 84, 137
SmartBeams ...................45
Snow
Tires....................206
SpareTires.................207, 208
Spark Plugs ...................214
Specifications
Oil ......................214
Speed Control
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ..........149
Cancel ....................147
Resume ....................147
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......146, 147
Starting....................24, 138
Remote ....................24
Starting And Operating .............138
Starting Procedures ...............138
Steering
Tilt Column ..................42
Wheel, Heated ................42
Wheel, Tilt ..................42
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls ...................219
Storage, Vehicle .................58
Stuck, Freeing ..................187
SunRoof ...................61, 63
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag . . .106
System, Remote Starting .............24
Telescoping Steering Column ..........42
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ....53
Tilt Steering Column ...............42
Time Delay
Headlight ...................44
Tips........................219
Tire And Loading Information Placard .....199
Tire Markings ..................195
Tires................137, 202, 207, 210
Aging (Life Of Tires) ............205
Air Pressure .................202
239
Changing ................174, 195
CompactSpare...............207
General Information ..........202, 207
High Speed .................203
Inflation Pressure ..............202
Jacking .................174, 195
Life Of Tires .................205
Load Capacity ................199
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .82, 91
Quality Grading ...............210
Radial ....................203
Replacement ................205
Safety ..................195, 202
Sizes .....................196
Snow Tires ..................206
SpareTires...............207, 208
Spinning ...................204
Tread Wear Indicators ............204
Wheel Nut Torque ..............212
Tire Safety Information .............195
Tire Service Kit .................179
To Open Hood ..................63
Towing ......................163
Disabled Vehicle ...............188
Recreational .................164
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........164
Trailer Towing ..................163
Transaxle
Automatic ..................144
Operation ..................144
Transporting Pets ................134
Tread Wear Indicators..............204
Turn Signals..................44, 84
Uconnect
Theater ....................221
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..........210
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .........99
USB.......................219
V
ehicle Loading .................199
Vehicle Storage ..................58
Ventilated Seats..................38
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) .................81
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ..........209
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ..........209
Window Fogging .................59
Windshield Defroster ..............135
Windshield Washers ...............47
Wipers, Intermittent ...............47
Wrecker Towing .................188
INDEX
240
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in
a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that
may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation
or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous
and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o
the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
IMPORTANT: Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/
Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca
(Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and
follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-800-247-9753 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This guide has been prepared to help you get quickly acquainted with your new Chrysler brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions. However, it is not a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL: Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend
or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have
been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-road highway motor
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are
known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize
exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in
a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
2019 USER GUIDE
CHRYSLER PACIFICA HYBRID
19RUPHEV-926-AA
SECOND EDITION
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps
to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler
brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
www.chrysler.com/en/owners (U.S.) provides special oers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and
more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and
the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on
the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the
instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
Download a FREE electronic copy of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Chrysler.com (U.S.)
Chrysler.ca (Canada)
